Mercurial > emacs
annotate man/reftex.texi @ 89191:06c052d0f579
*** empty log message ***
| author | Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org> |
|---|---|
| date | Thu, 10 Oct 2002 09:03:32 +0000 |
| parents | 421e0a91a1d1 |
| children | 2406cf2da1d4 |
| rev | line source |
|---|---|
| 25829 | 1 \input texinfo @c -*-texinfo-*- |
| 2 @c %**start of header | |
| 38003 | 3 @setfilename ../info/reftex |
| 25829 | 4 @settitle RefTeX User Manual |
| 30009 | 5 @dircategory Emacs |
| 25829 | 6 @direntry |
| 7 * RefTeX: (reftex). Emacs support for LaTeX cross-references and citations. | |
| 8 @end direntry | |
| 9 @synindex ky cp | |
| 10 @syncodeindex vr cp | |
| 11 @syncodeindex fn cp | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
12 @set VERSION 4.16 |
|
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
13 @set EDITION 4.16 |
|
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
14 @set DATE June 2001 |
| 25829 | 15 @set AUTHOR Carsten Dominik |
|
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
16 @set AUTHOR-EMAIL dominik@@astro.uva.nl |
| 25829 | 17 @set MAINTAINER Carsten Dominik |
|
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
18 @set MAINTAINER-EMAIL dominik@@astro.uva.nl |
| 25829 | 19 @c %**end of header |
| 20 @finalout | |
| 21 | |
| 22 @c Macro definitions | |
| 23 | |
| 24 @c Subheadings inside a table. Need a difference between info and the rest. | |
| 25 @macro tablesubheading{text} | |
| 26 @ifinfo | |
| 27 @subsubheading \text\ | |
| 28 @end ifinfo | |
| 29 @ifnotinfo | |
| 30 @item @b{\text\} | |
| 31 @end ifnotinfo | |
| 32 @end macro | |
| 33 | |
| 34 @ifinfo | |
| 35 This file documents @b{Ref@TeX{}}, a package to do labels, references, | |
| 36 citations and indices for LaTeX documents with Emacs.@refill | |
| 37 | |
| 38 This is edition @value{EDITION} of the @b{Ref@TeX{}} User Manual for | |
| 39 @b{Ref@TeX{}} @value{VERSION}@refill | |
| 40 | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
41 Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 25829 | 42 |
|
37404
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
43 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
44 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
45 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
46 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
47 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
48 license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
49 License'' in the Emacs manual. |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
50 |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
51 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
52 this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
53 Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.'' |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
54 |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
55 This document is part of a collection distributed under the GNU Free |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
56 Documentation License. If you want to distribute this document |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
57 separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
58 license to the document, as described in section 6 of the license. |
| 25829 | 59 @end ifinfo |
| 60 | |
| 61 @titlepage | |
| 62 @title Ref@TeX{} User Manual | |
| 63 @subtitle Support for LaTeX labels, references, citations and index entries with GNU Emacs | |
| 64 @subtitle Edition @value{EDITION}, @value{DATE} | |
| 65 | |
| 66 @author by Carsten Dominik | |
| 67 @page | |
|
37038
528310f62c34
(Finding Files): Fix an example.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36509
diff
changeset
|
68 Copyright @copyright{} 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
| 25829 | 69 |
| 70 @sp 2 | |
| 71 This is edition @value{EDITION} of the @cite{Ref@TeX{} User Manual} for | |
| 72 @b{Ref@TeX{}} version @value{VERSION}, @value{DATE}.@refill | |
| 73 | |
| 74 @sp 2 | |
| 75 | |
|
37404
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
76 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
77 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
78 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
79 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
80 Manual'', and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
81 license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
82 License'' in the Emacs manual. |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
83 |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
84 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
85 this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
86 Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.'' |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
87 |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
88 This document is part of a collection distributed under the GNU Free |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
89 Documentation License. If you want to distribute this document |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
90 separately from the collection, you can do so by adding a copy of the |
|
730f77edf073
Use GNU Free Documentation License.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
37038
diff
changeset
|
91 license to the document, as described in section 6 of the license. |
| 25829 | 92 @end titlepage |
| 93 @page | |
| 94 | |
|
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
95 @ifnottex |
| 25829 | 96 @node Top,,,(dir) |
| 97 | |
| 98 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is a package for managing Labels, References, | |
| 99 Citations and index entries with GNU Emacs.@refill | |
| 100 | |
| 101 Don't be discouraged by the size of this manual, which covers | |
| 102 @b{Ref@TeX{}} in great depth. All you need to know to use | |
| 103 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be summarized on two pages (@pxref{RefTeX in a | |
| 104 Nutshell}). You can go back later to other parts of this document when | |
| 105 needed.@refill | |
| 106 | |
| 107 @menu | |
| 108 * Introduction:: Quick-Start information. | |
| 109 | |
| 110 * Table of Contents:: A Tool to move around quickly. | |
| 111 * Labels and References:: Creating and referencing labels. | |
| 112 * Citations:: Creating Citations. | |
| 113 * Index Support:: Creating and Checking Index Entries. | |
| 114 * Viewing Cross-References:: Who references or cites what? | |
| 115 | |
| 116 * RefTeXs Menu:: The Ref menu in the menubar. | |
| 39267 | 117 * Key Bindings:: The default key bindings. |
| 25829 | 118 * Faces:: Fontification of RefTeX's buffers. |
| 119 * Multifile Documents:: Document spread over many files. | |
| 120 * Language Support:: How to support other languages. | |
| 121 * Finding Files:: Included TeX files and BibTeX .bib files. | |
| 122 * AUCTeX:: Cooperation with AUCTeX. | |
| 123 * Optimizations:: When RefTeX is too slow. | |
| 124 * Problems and Work-Arounds:: First Aid. | |
| 125 * Imprint:: Author, Web-site, Thanks | |
| 126 | |
| 127 * Commands:: Which are the available commands. | |
| 128 * Options:: How to extend and configure RefTeX. | |
| 129 * Keymaps and Hooks:: For customization. | |
| 130 * Changes:: A List of recent changes to RefTeX. | |
| 131 | |
| 132 The Index | |
| 133 | |
| 134 * Index:: The full index. | |
| 135 | |
| 136 @detailmenu | |
| 137 | |
| 138 Introduction | |
| 139 | |
| 140 * Installation:: How to install and activate RefTeX. | |
| 141 * RefTeX in a Nutshell:: A brief summary and quick guide. | |
| 142 | |
| 143 Labels and References | |
| 144 | |
| 145 * Creating Labels:: | |
| 146 * Referencing Labels:: | |
| 147 * Builtin Label Environments:: The environments RefTeX knows about. | |
| 148 * Defining Label Environments:: ... and environments it doesn't. | |
| 149 * Reference Info:: View the label corresponding to a \ref. | |
| 150 * xr (LaTeX package):: References to external documents. | |
| 151 * varioref (LaTeX package):: How to create \vref instead of \ref. | |
| 152 * fancyref (LaTeX package):: How to create \fref instead of \ref. | |
| 153 | |
| 154 Defining Label Environments | |
| 155 | |
| 156 * Theorem and Axiom:: Defined with @code{\newenvironment}. | |
| 157 * Quick Equation:: When a macro sets the label type. | |
| 158 * Figure Wrapper:: When a macro argument is a label. | |
| 159 * Adding Magic Words:: Other words for other languages. | |
| 160 * Using \eqref:: How to switch to this AMS-LaTeX macro. | |
| 161 * Non-Standard Environments:: Environments without \begin and \end | |
| 162 * Putting it Together:: How to combine many entries. | |
| 163 | |
| 164 Citations | |
| 165 | |
| 166 * Creating Citations:: How to create them. | |
| 167 * Citation Styles:: Natbib, Harvard, Chicago and Co. | |
| 168 * Citation Info:: View the corresponding database entry. | |
| 169 * Chapterbib and Bibunits:: Multiple bibliographies in a Document. | |
| 170 * Citations Outside LaTeX:: How to make citations in Emails etc. | |
| 171 | |
| 172 Index Support | |
| 173 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
174 * Creating Index Entries:: Macros and completion of entries. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
175 * The Index Phrases File:: A special file for global indexing. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
176 * Displaying and Editing the Index:: The index editor. |
| 25829 | 177 * Builtin Index Macros:: The index macros RefTeX knows about. |
| 178 * Defining Index Macros:: ... and macros it doesn't. | |
| 179 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
180 The Index Phrases File |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
181 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
182 * Collecting Phrases:: Collecting from document or external. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
183 * Consistency Checks:: Check for duplicates etc. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
184 * Global Indexing:: The interactive indexing process. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
185 |
| 25829 | 186 AUCTeX |
| 187 | |
| 188 * AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface:: How both packages work together | |
| 189 * Style Files:: AUCTeX's style files can support RefTeX | |
| 190 * Bib-Cite:: Hypertext reading of a document | |
| 191 | |
| 192 Options, Keymaps, Hooks | |
| 193 | |
| 194 * Options (Table of Contents):: | |
| 195 * Options (Defining Label Environments):: | |
| 196 * Options (Creating Labels):: | |
| 197 * Options (Referencing Labels):: | |
| 198 * Options (Creating Citations):: | |
| 199 * Options (Index Support):: | |
| 200 * Options (Viewing Cross-References):: | |
| 201 * Options (Finding Files):: | |
| 202 * Options (Optimizations):: | |
| 203 * Options (Fontification):: | |
| 204 * Options (Misc):: | |
| 205 | |
| 206 @end detailmenu | |
| 207 @end menu | |
| 208 | |
|
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
209 @end ifnottex |
| 25829 | 210 |
| 211 @node Introduction, Table of Contents, , Top | |
| 212 @chapter Introduction | |
| 213 @cindex Introduction | |
| 214 | |
| 215 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is a specialized package for support of labels, | |
| 216 references, citations, and the index in LaTeX. @b{Ref@TeX{}} wraps | |
| 217 itself round 4 LaTeX macros: @code{\label}, @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, | |
| 218 and @code{\index}. Using these macros usually requires looking up | |
| 219 different parts of the document and searching through BibTeX database | |
| 220 files. @b{Ref@TeX{}} automates these time--consuming tasks almost | |
| 221 entirely. It also provides functions to display the structure of a | |
| 222 document and to move around in this structure quickly.@refill | |
| 223 | |
| 224 @iftex | |
| 225 Don't be discouraged by the size of this manual, which covers @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
| 226 in great depth. All you need to know to use @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be | |
| 227 summarized on two pages (@pxref{RefTeX in a Nutshell}). You can go | |
| 228 back later to other parts of this document when needed. | |
| 229 @end iftex | |
| 230 | |
| 231 @xref{Imprint}, for information about who to contact for help, bug | |
| 232 reports or suggestions. | |
| 233 | |
| 234 @menu | |
| 235 * Installation:: How to install and activate RefTeX. | |
| 236 * RefTeX in a Nutshell:: A brief summary and quick guide. | |
| 237 @end menu | |
| 238 | |
| 239 @node Installation, RefTeX in a Nutshell, , Introduction | |
| 240 @section Installation | |
| 241 @cindex Installation | |
| 242 | |
| 243 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is bundled and pre--installed with Emacs since version 20.2. | |
| 244 It was also bundled and pre--installed with XEmacs 19.16--20.x. XEmacs | |
| 245 21.x users want to install the corresponding plug-in package which is | |
| 246 available from the | |
| 247 @uref{ftp://ftp.xemacs.org/pub/xemacs/packages/,XEmacs ftp site}. See | |
| 248 the XEmacs 21.x documentation on package installation for | |
| 249 details.@refill | |
| 250 | |
| 251 Users of earlier Emacs distributions (including Emacs 19) can get a copy | |
| 252 of the @b{Ref@TeX{}} distribution from the maintainers web-page. | |
| 253 @xref{Imprint}, for more information.@refill | |
| 254 | |
| 255 @section Environment | |
| 256 @cindex Finding files | |
| 257 @cindex BibTeX database files, not found | |
| 258 @cindex TeX files, not found | |
| 259 @cindex @code{TEXINPUTS}, environment variable | |
| 260 @cindex @code{BIBINPUTS}, environment variable | |
| 261 | |
| 262 @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to access all files which are part of a multifile | |
| 263 document, and the BibTeX database files requested by the | |
| 264 @code{\bibliography} command. To find these files, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
| 265 require a search path, i.e. a list of directories to check. Normally | |
| 266 this list is stored in the environment variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and | |
| 267 @code{BIBINPUTS} which are also used by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. However, on some | |
| 268 systems these variables do not contain the full search path. If | |
| 269 @b{Ref@TeX{}} does not work for you because it cannot find some files, | |
| 270 read @ref{Finding Files}. | |
| 271 | |
| 272 @section Entering @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode | |
| 273 | |
| 274 @findex turn-on-reftex | |
| 275 @findex reftex-mode | |
| 276 @vindex LaTeX-mode-hook | |
| 277 @vindex latex-mode-hook | |
| 278 To turn @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode on and off in a particular buffer, use | |
| 279 @kbd{M-x reftex-mode}. To turn on @b{Ref@TeX{}} Mode for all LaTeX | |
| 280 files, add the following lines to your @file{.emacs} file:@refill | |
| 281 | |
| 282 @example | |
| 283 (add-hook 'LaTeX-mode-hook 'turn-on-reftex) ; with AUCTeX LaTeX mode | |
| 284 (add-hook 'latex-mode-hook 'turn-on-reftex) ; with Emacs latex mode | |
| 285 @end example | |
| 286 | |
| 287 @page | |
| 288 @node RefTeX in a Nutshell, , Installation, Introduction | |
| 289 @section @b{Ref@TeX{}} in a Nutshell | |
| 290 @cindex Quick-Start | |
| 291 @cindex Getting Started | |
| 292 @cindex RefTeX in a Nutshell | |
| 293 @cindex Nutshell, RefTeX in a | |
| 294 | |
| 295 @enumerate | |
| 296 @item | |
| 297 @b{Table of Contents}@* Typing @kbd{C-c =} (@code{reftex-toc}) will show | |
| 298 a table of contents of the document. This buffer can display sections, | |
| 299 labels and index entries defined in the document. From the buffer, you | |
| 300 can jump quickly to every part of your document. Press @kbd{?} to get | |
| 301 help.@refill | |
| 302 | |
| 303 @item | |
| 304 @b{Labels and References}@* @b{Ref@TeX{}} helps to create unique labels | |
| 305 and to find the correct key for references quickly. It distinguishes | |
| 306 labels for different environments, knows about all standard | |
| 307 environments (and many others), and can be configured to recognize any | |
| 308 additional labeled environments you have defined yourself (variable | |
| 309 @code{reftex-label-alist}).@refill | |
| 310 | |
| 311 @itemize @bullet | |
| 312 @item | |
| 313 @b{Creating Labels}@* | |
| 314 Type @kbd{C-c (} (@code{reftex-label}) to insert a label at point. | |
| 315 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will either | |
| 316 @itemize @minus | |
| 317 @item | |
| 318 derive a label from context (default for section labels) | |
| 319 @item | |
| 320 prompt for a label string (default for figures and tables) or | |
| 321 @item | |
| 322 insert a simple label made of a prefix and a number (all other | |
| 323 environments)@refill | |
| 324 @end itemize | |
| 325 @noindent | |
| 326 Which labels are created how is configurable with the variable | |
| 327 @code{reftex-insert-label-flags}.@refill | |
| 328 | |
| 329 @item | |
| 330 @b{Referencing Labels}@* To make a reference, type @kbd{C-c )} | |
| 331 (@code{reftex-reference}). This shows an outline of the document with | |
| 332 all labels of a certain type (figure, equation,...) and some label | |
| 333 context. Selecting a label inserts a @code{\ref@{@var{label}@}} macro | |
| 334 into the original buffer.@refill | |
| 335 @end itemize | |
| 336 | |
| 337 @item | |
| 338 @b{Citations}@* | |
| 339 Typing @kbd{C-c [} (@code{reftex-citation}) will let you specify a | |
| 340 regular expression to search in current BibTeX database files (as | |
| 341 specified in the @code{\bibliography} command) and pull out a list of | |
| 342 matches for you to choose from. The list is @emph{formatted} and | |
| 343 sorted. The selected article is referenced as @samp{\cite@{@var{key}@}} | |
| 344 (see the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} if you want to insert | |
| 345 different macros).@refill | |
| 346 | |
| 347 @item | |
| 348 @b{Index Support}@* | |
| 349 @b{Ref@TeX{}} helps to enter index entries. It also compiles all | |
| 350 entries into an alphabetically sorted @file{*Index*} buffer which you | |
| 351 can use to check and edit the entries. @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows about the | |
| 352 standard index macros and can be configured to recognize any additional | |
| 353 macros you have defined (@code{reftex-index-macros}). Multiple indices | |
| 354 are supported.@refill | |
| 355 | |
| 356 @itemize @bullet | |
| 357 @item | |
| 358 @b{Creating Index Entries}@* | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
359 To index the current selection or the word at point, type @kbd{C-c /} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
360 (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). The default macro |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
361 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} will be used. For a more complex entry |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
362 type @kbd{C-c <} (@code{reftex-index}), select any of the index macros |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
363 and enter the arguments with completion.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
364 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
365 @item |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
366 @b{The Index Phrases File (Delayed Indexing)}@* |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
367 Type @kbd{C-c \} (@code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word}) to add |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
368 the current word or selection to a special @emph{index phrase file}. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
369 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can later search the document for occurrences of these |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
370 phrases and let you interactively index the matches.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
371 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
372 @item |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
373 @b{Displaying and Editing the Index}@* |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
374 To display the compiled index in a special buffer, type @kbd{C-c >} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
375 (@code{reftex-display-index}). From that buffer you can check and edit |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
376 all entries.@refill |
| 25829 | 377 @end itemize |
| 378 | |
| 379 @page | |
| 380 @item @b{Viewing Cross-References}@* | |
| 381 When point is on the @var{key} argument of a cross--referencing macro | |
| 382 (@code{\label}, @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, | |
| 383 @code{\index}, and variations) or inside a BibTeX database entry, you | |
| 384 can press @kbd{C-c &} (@code{reftex-view-crossref}) to display | |
| 385 corresponding locations in the document and associated BibTeX database | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
386 files.@refill @* |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
387 When the enclosing macro is @code{\cite} or @code{\ref} and no other |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
388 message occupies the echo area, information about the citation or label |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
389 will automatically be displayed in the echo area.@refill |
| 25829 | 390 |
| 391 @item | |
| 392 @b{Multifile Documents}@* | |
| 393 Multifile Documents are fully supported. The included files must have a | |
| 394 file variable @code{TeX-master} or @code{tex-main-file} pointing to the | |
| 395 master file. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides cross-referencing information from | |
| 396 all parts of the document, and across document borders | |
| 397 (@file{xr.sty}).@refill | |
| 398 | |
| 399 @item | |
| 400 @b{Document Parsing}@* @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to parse the document in | |
| 401 order to find labels and other information. It does it automatically | |
| 402 once and updates its list internally when @code{reftex-label} and | |
| 403 @code{reftex-index} are used. To enforce reparsing, call any of the | |
| 404 commands described above with a raw @kbd{C-u} prefix, or press the | |
| 405 @kbd{r} key in the label selection buffer, the table of contents | |
| 406 buffer, or the index buffer.@refill | |
| 407 | |
| 408 @item | |
| 409 @b{AUCTeX} @* If your major LaTeX mode is AUCTeX, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can | |
| 410 cooperate with it (see variable @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX}). AUCTeX | |
| 411 contains style files which trigger appropriate settings in | |
| 412 @b{Ref@TeX{}}, so that for many of the popular LaTeX packages no | |
| 413 additional customizations will be necessary.@refill | |
| 414 | |
| 415 @item | |
| 416 @b{Useful Settings}@* To make @b{Ref@TeX{}} faster for large documents, | |
| 417 try these:@refill | |
| 418 @lisp | |
| 419 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
| 420 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
| 421 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
| 422 @end lisp | |
| 423 | |
| 424 To integrate with AUCTeX, use | |
| 425 @lisp | |
| 426 (setq reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX t) | |
| 427 @end lisp | |
| 428 | |
| 429 To make your own LaTeX macro definitions known to @b{Ref@TeX{}}, | |
| 430 customize the variables@refill | |
| 431 @example | |
| 432 @code{reftex-label-alist} @r{(for label macros/environments)} | |
| 433 @code{reftex-section-levels} @r{(for sectioning commands)} | |
| 434 @code{reftex-cite-format} @r{(for @code{\cite}-like macros)} | |
| 435 @code{reftex-index-macros} @r{(for @code{\index}-like macros)} | |
| 436 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} @r{(to set the default macro)} | |
| 437 @end example | |
| 438 If you have a large number of macros defined, you may want to write | |
| 439 an AUCTeX style file to support them with both AUCTeX and | |
| 440 @b{Ref@TeX{}}.@refill | |
| 441 | |
| 442 @item @b{Where Next?}@* Go ahead and use @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Use its menus | |
| 443 until you have picked up the key bindings. For an overview of what you | |
| 444 can do in each of the different special buffers, press @kbd{?}. Read | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
445 the manual if you get stuck, of if you are curious what else might be |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
446 available. The first part of the manual explains in |
| 25829 | 447 a tutorial way how to use and customize @b{Ref@TeX{}}. The second |
| 448 part is a command and variable reference.@refill | |
| 449 @end enumerate | |
| 450 | |
| 451 @node Table of Contents, Labels and References, Introduction, Top | |
| 452 @chapter Table of Contents | |
| 453 @cindex @file{*toc*} buffer | |
| 454 @cindex Table of contents buffer | |
| 455 @findex reftex-toc | |
| 456 @kindex C-c = | |
| 457 | |
| 458 Pressing the keys @kbd{C-c =} pops up a buffer showing the table of | |
| 459 contents of the document. By default, this @file{*toc*} buffer shows | |
| 460 only the sections of a document. Using the @kbd{l} and @kbd{i} keys you | |
| 461 can display all labels and index entries defined in the document as | |
| 462 well.@refill | |
| 463 | |
| 464 With the cursor in any of the lines denoting a location in the | |
| 465 document, simple key strokes will display the corresponding part in | |
| 466 another window, jump to that location, or perform other actions.@refill | |
| 467 | |
| 468 @kindex ? | |
| 469 Here is a list of special commands in the @file{*toc*} buffer. A | |
| 470 summary of this information is always available by pressing | |
| 471 @kbd{?}.@refill | |
| 472 | |
| 473 @table @kbd | |
| 474 | |
| 475 @tablesubheading{General} | |
| 476 @item ? | |
| 477 Display a summary of commands. | |
| 478 | |
| 479 @item 0-9, - | |
| 480 Prefix argument. | |
| 481 | |
| 482 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
| 483 @item n | |
| 484 Goto next entry in the table of context. | |
| 485 | |
| 486 @item p | |
| 487 Goto previous entry in the table of context. | |
| 488 | |
| 489 @item C-c C-n | |
| 490 Goto next section heading. Useful when many labels and index entries | |
| 491 separate section headings.@refill | |
| 492 | |
| 493 @item C-c C-p | |
| 494 Goto previous section heading. | |
| 495 | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
496 @item N z |
|
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
497 Jump to section N, using the prefix arg. For example, @kbd{3 z} jumps |
|
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
498 to section 3.@refill |
|
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
499 |
| 25829 | 500 @tablesubheading{Access to document locations} |
| 501 @item @key{SPC} | |
| 502 Show the corresponding location in another window. This command does | |
| 503 @emph{not} select that other window.@refill | |
| 504 | |
| 505 @item @key{TAB} | |
| 506 Goto the location in another window. | |
| 507 | |
| 508 @item @key{RET} | |
| 509 Go to the location and hide the @file{*toc*} buffer. This will restore | |
| 510 the window configuration before @code{reftex-toc} (@kbd{C-c =}) was | |
| 511 called.@refill | |
| 512 | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
513 @item mouse-2 |
| 25829 | 514 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
| 515 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a line has the same effect as @key{RET}. | |
| 516 See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
| 517 (Fontification)}.@refill | |
| 518 | |
| 519 @item f | |
| 520 @vindex reftex-toc-follow-mode | |
| 521 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
| 522 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
| 523 always show the location corresponding to the line at point in the | |
| 524 @file{*toc*} buffer. This is similar to pressing @key{SPC} after each | |
| 525 cursor motion. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
| 526 @code{reftex-toc-follow-mode}. Note that only context in files already | |
| 527 visited is shown. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not visit a file just for follow | |
| 528 mode. See, however, the variable | |
| 529 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}.@refill | |
| 530 | |
| 531 @item . | |
| 532 Show calling point in another window. This is the point from where | |
| 533 @code{reftex-toc} was last called. | |
| 534 | |
| 535 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
| 536 @item q | |
| 537 Hide the @file{*toc*} buffer, return to the position where | |
| 538 @code{reftex-toc} was last called.@refill | |
| 539 | |
| 540 @item k | |
| 541 Kill the @file{*toc*} buffer, return to the position where | |
| 542 @code{reftex-toc} was last called.@refill | |
| 543 | |
| 544 @item C-c > | |
| 545 Switch to the @file{*Index*} buffer of this document. With prefix | |
| 546 @samp{2}, restrict the index to the section at point in the @file{*toc*} | |
| 547 buffer. | |
| 548 | |
| 549 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
| 550 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
551 @item t |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
552 @vindex reftex-toc-max-level |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
553 Change the maximum level of toc entries displayed in the @file{*toc*} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
554 buffer. Without prefix arg, all levels will be included. With prefix |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
555 arg (e.g @kbd{3 t}), ignore all toc entries with level greater than |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
556 @var{arg} (3 in this case). Chapters are level 1, sections are level 2. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
557 The mode line @samp{T<>} indicator shows the current value. The default |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
558 depth can be configured with the variable |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
559 @code{reftex-toc-max-level}.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
560 |
| 25829 | 561 @item F |
| 562 @vindex reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries | |
| 563 Toggle the display of the file borders of a multifile document in the | |
| 564 @file{*toc*} buffer. The default for this flag can be set with the | |
| 565 variable @code{reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries}.@refill | |
| 566 | |
| 567 @item l | |
| 568 @vindex reftex-toc-include-labels | |
| 569 Toggle the display of labels in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The default | |
| 570 for this flag can be set with the variable | |
| 571 @code{reftex-toc-include-labels}. When called with a prefix argument, | |
| 572 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a label type and include only labels of | |
| 573 the selected type in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The mode line @samp{L<>} | |
| 574 indicator shows which labels are included.@refill | |
| 575 | |
| 576 @item i | |
| 577 @vindex reftex-toc-include-index-entries | |
| 578 Toggle the display of index entries in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The | |
| 579 default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
| 580 @code{reftex-toc-include-index-entries}. When called with a prefix | |
| 581 argument, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a specific index and include | |
| 582 only entries in the selected index in the @file{*toc*} buffer. The mode | |
| 583 line @samp{I<>} indicator shows which index is used.@refill | |
| 584 | |
| 585 @item c | |
| 586 @vindex reftex-toc-include-context | |
| 587 Toggle the display of label and index context in the @file{*toc*} | |
| 588 buffer. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
| 589 @code{reftex-toc-include-context}.@refill | |
| 590 | |
| 591 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
| 592 | |
| 593 @item g | |
| 594 Rebuild the @file{*toc*} buffer. This does @emph{not} rescan the | |
| 595 document.@refill | |
| 596 | |
| 597 @item r | |
| 598 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
| 599 Reparse the LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*toc*} buffer. When | |
| 600 @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is non-nil, rescan only the file this | |
| 601 location is defined in, not the entire document.@refill | |
| 602 | |
| 603 @item C-u r | |
| 604 Reparse the @emph{entire} LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*toc*} | |
| 605 buffer.@refill | |
| 606 | |
| 607 @item x | |
| 608 Switch to the @file{*toc*} buffer of an external document. When the | |
| 609 current document is using the @code{xr} package (@pxref{xr (LaTeX | |
| 610 package)}), @b{Ref@TeX{}} will switch to one of the external | |
| 611 documents.@refill | |
| 612 | |
| 613 @end table | |
| 614 | |
| 615 @vindex reftex-toc-map | |
| 616 In order to define additional commands for the @file{*toc*} buffer, the | |
| 617 keymap @code{reftex-toc-map} may be used.@refill | |
| 618 | |
| 619 @cindex Sectioning commands | |
| 620 @cindex KOMA-Script, LaTeX classes | |
| 621 @cindex LaTeX classes, KOMA-Script | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
622 @cindex TOC entries for environments |
| 25829 | 623 @vindex reftex-section-levels |
| 624 The section macros recognized by @b{Ref@TeX{}} are all LaTeX section | |
| 625 macros (from @code{\part} to @code{\subsubparagraph}) and the commands | |
| 626 @code{\addchap} and @code{\addsec} from the KOMA-Script classes. | |
| 627 Additional macros can be configured with the variable | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
628 @code{reftex-section-levels}. It is also possible to add certain LaTeX |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
629 environments to the table of contents. This is probably only useful for |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
630 theorem-like environments. @xref{Defining Label Environments}, for an |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
631 example. |
| 25829 | 632 |
| 633 @node Labels and References, Citations, Table of Contents, Top | |
| 634 @chapter Labels and References | |
| 635 @cindex Labels in LaTeX | |
| 636 @cindex References in LaTeX | |
| 637 @cindex Label category | |
| 638 @cindex Label environment | |
| 639 @cindex @code{\label} | |
| 640 | |
| 641 LaTeX provides a powerful mechanism to deal with cross--references in a | |
| 642 document. When writing a document, any part of it can be marked with a | |
| 643 label, like @samp{\label@{mark@}}. LaTeX records the current value of a | |
| 644 certain counter when a label is defined. Later references to this label | |
| 645 (like @samp{\ref@{mark@}}) will produce the recorded value of the | |
| 646 counter.@refill | |
| 647 | |
| 648 Labels can be used to mark sections, figures, tables, equations, | |
| 649 footnotes, items in enumerate lists etc. LaTeX is context sensitive in | |
| 650 doing this: A label defined in a figure environment automatically | |
| 651 records the figure counter, not the section counter.@refill | |
| 652 | |
| 653 Several different environments can share a common counter and therefore | |
| 654 a common label category. E.g. labels in both @code{equation} and | |
| 655 @code{eqnarray} environments record the value of the same counter - the | |
| 656 equation counter.@refill | |
| 657 | |
| 658 @menu | |
| 659 * Creating Labels:: | |
| 660 * Referencing Labels:: | |
| 661 * Builtin Label Environments:: The environments RefTeX knows about. | |
| 662 * Defining Label Environments:: ... and environments it doesn't. | |
| 663 * Reference Info:: View the label corresponding to a \ref. | |
| 664 * xr (LaTeX package):: References to external documents. | |
| 665 * varioref (LaTeX package):: How to create \vref instead of \ref. | |
| 666 * fancyref (LaTeX package):: How to create \fref instead of \ref. | |
| 667 @end menu | |
| 668 | |
| 669 @node Creating Labels, Referencing Labels, , Labels and References | |
| 670 @section Creating Labels | |
| 671 @cindex Creating labels | |
| 672 @cindex Labels, creating | |
| 673 @cindex Labels, deriving from context | |
| 674 @kindex C-c ( | |
| 675 @findex reftex-label | |
| 676 | |
| 677 In order to create a label in a LaTeX document, press @kbd{C-c (} | |
| 678 (@code{reftex-label}). Just like LaTeX, @b{Ref@TeX{}} is context sensitive | |
| 679 and will figure out the environment it currently is in and adapt the | |
| 680 label to that environment. A label usually consists of a short prefix | |
| 681 indicating the type of the label and a unique mark. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has | |
| 682 3 different modes to create this mark.@refill | |
| 683 | |
| 684 @enumerate | |
| 685 @item | |
| 686 @vindex reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
| 687 @vindex reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
| 688 @vindex reftex-label-illegal-re | |
| 689 @vindex reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
| 690 A label can be derived from context. This means, @b{Ref@TeX{}} takes | |
| 691 the context of the label definition and constructs a label from | |
| 692 that@footnote{Note that the context may contain constructs which are | |
| 693 illegal in labels. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will therefore strip the accent from | |
| 694 accented Latin-1 characters and remove everything else which is not | |
| 695 legal in labels. This mechanism is safe, but may not be satisfactory | |
| 696 for non-western languages. Check the following variables if you need to | |
| 697 change things: @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function}, | |
| 698 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}, @code{reftex-label-illegal-re}, | |
| 699 @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}.}. This works best for section labels, | |
| 700 where the section heading is used to construct a label. In fact, | |
| 701 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default settings use this method only for section | |
| 702 labels. You will be asked to confirm the derived label, or edit | |
| 703 it.@refill | |
| 704 | |
| 705 @item | |
| 706 We may also use a simple unique number to identify a label. This is | |
| 707 mostly useful for labels where it is difficult to come up with a very | |
| 708 good descriptive name. @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default settings use this method | |
| 709 for equations, enumerate items and footnotes. The author of @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
| 710 tends to write documents with many equations and finds it impossible | |
| 711 to come up with good names for each of them. These simple labels are | |
| 712 inserted without query, and are therefore very fast. Good descriptive | |
| 713 names are not really necessary as @b{Ref@TeX{}} will provide context to | |
| 714 reference a label (@pxref{Referencing Labels}).@refill | |
| 715 | |
| 716 @item | |
| 717 The third method is to ask the user for a label. This is most | |
| 718 useful for things which are easy to describe briefly and do not turn up | |
| 719 too frequently in a document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} uses this for figures and | |
| 720 tables. Of course, one can enter the label directly by typing the full | |
| 721 @samp{\label@{mark@}}. The advantage of using @code{reftex-label} | |
| 722 anyway is that @b{Ref@TeX{}} will know that a new label has been defined. | |
| 723 It will then not be necessary to rescan the document in order to access | |
| 724 this label later.@refill | |
| 725 @end enumerate | |
| 726 | |
| 727 @vindex reftex-insert-label-flags | |
| 728 If you want to change the way certain labels are created, check out the | |
| 729 variable @code{reftex-insert-label-flags} (@pxref{Options (Creating | |
| 730 Labels)}).@refill | |
| 731 | |
| 732 If you are using AUCTeX to write your LaTeX documents, you can | |
| 733 set it up to delegate the creation of labels to | |
| 734 @b{Ref@TeX{}}. @xref{AUCTeX}, for more information. | |
| 735 | |
| 736 @node Referencing Labels, Builtin Label Environments, Creating Labels, Labels and References | |
| 737 @section Referencing Labels | |
| 738 @cindex Referencing labels | |
| 739 @cindex Labels, referencing | |
| 740 @cindex Selection buffer, labels | |
| 741 @cindex Selection process | |
| 742 @cindex @code{\ref} | |
| 743 @kindex C-c ) | |
| 744 @findex reftex-reference | |
| 745 | |
| 746 Referencing Labels is really at the heart of @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Press @kbd{C-c | |
| 747 )} in order to reference a label (reftex-reference). This will start a | |
| 748 selection process and finally insert the complete @samp{\ref@{label@}} | |
| 749 into the buffer.@refill | |
| 750 | |
| 751 First, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will determine the label category which is required. | |
| 752 Often that can be figured out from context. For example, if you | |
| 753 write @samp{As shown in eq.} and the press @kbd{C-c )}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows | |
| 754 that an equation label is going to be referenced. If it cannot figure | |
| 755 out what label category is needed, it will query for one.@refill | |
| 756 | |
| 757 You will then be presented with a label selection menu. This is a | |
| 758 special buffer which contains an outline of the document along with all | |
| 759 labels of the given label category. In addition, next to the label | |
| 760 there will be one line of context of the label definition, which is some | |
| 761 text in the buffer near the label definition. Usually this is | |
| 762 sufficient to identify the label. If you are unsure about a certain | |
| 763 label, pressing @key{SPC} will show the label definition point in | |
| 764 another window.@refill | |
| 765 | |
| 766 In order to reference a label, move to cursor to the correct label and | |
| 767 press @key{RET}. You can also reference several labels with a single | |
| 768 call to @code{reftex-reference} by marking entries with the @kbd{m} | |
| 769 key (see below). | |
| 770 | |
| 771 @kindex ? | |
| 772 Here is a list of special commands in the selection buffer. A summary | |
| 773 of this information is always available from the selection process by | |
| 774 pressing @kbd{?}.@refill | |
| 775 | |
| 776 | |
| 777 | |
| 778 @table @kbd | |
| 779 @tablesubheading{General} | |
| 780 @item ? | |
| 781 Show a summary of available commands. | |
| 782 | |
| 783 @item 0-9,- | |
| 784 Prefix argument. | |
| 785 | |
| 786 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
| 787 @item n | |
| 788 Go to next label. | |
| 789 | |
| 790 @item p | |
| 791 Go to previous label. | |
| 792 | |
| 793 @item b | |
| 794 Jump back to the position where you last left the selection buffer. | |
| 795 Normally this should get you back to the last referenced label.@refill | |
| 796 | |
| 797 @item C-c C-n | |
| 798 Goto next section heading. | |
| 799 | |
| 800 @item C-c C-p | |
| 801 Goto previous section heading. | |
| 802 | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
803 @item N z |
|
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
804 Jump to section N, using the prefix arg. For example @kbd{3 z} jumps to |
|
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
805 section 3.@refill |
|
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
806 |
| 25829 | 807 @tablesubheading{Displaying Context} |
| 808 @item @key{SPC} | |
| 809 Show the surroundings of the definition of the current label in another | |
| 810 window. See also the @kbd{f} key.@refill | |
| 811 | |
| 812 @item f | |
| 813 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
| 814 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
| 815 always display the full context of the current label. This is similar | |
| 816 to pressing @key{SPC} after each cursor motion. Note that only context | |
| 817 in files already visited is shown. @b{RefTeX} will not visit a file | |
| 818 just for follow mode. See, however, the variable | |
| 819 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}.@refill | |
| 820 | |
| 821 @item . | |
| 822 Show insertion point in another window. This is the point from where you | |
| 823 called @code{reftex-reference}.@refill | |
| 824 | |
| 825 @tablesubheading{Selecting a label and creating the reference} | |
| 826 @item @key{RET} | |
| 827 Insert a reference to the label at point into the buffer from which the | |
| 828 selection process was started. When entries have been marked, @key{RET} | |
| 829 references all marked labels.@refill | |
| 830 | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
831 @item mouse-2 |
| 25829 | 832 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
| 833 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a label will accept it like @key{RET} | |
| 834 would. See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
| 835 (Misc)}.@refill | |
| 836 | |
| 837 @vindex reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
| 838 @item m - + , | |
| 839 Mark the current entry. When several entries have been marked, pressing | |
| 840 @kbd{RET} will accept all of them and place them into several | |
| 841 @code{\ref} macros. The special markers @samp{,-+} also store a | |
| 842 separator to be inserted before the corresponding reference. So marking | |
| 843 six entries with the keys @samp{m , , - , +} will give a reference list | |
| 844 like this (see the variable @code{reftex-multiref-punctuation}) | |
| 845 @example | |
| 846 In eqs. (1), (2), (3)--(4), (5) and (6) | |
| 847 @end example | |
| 848 | |
| 849 @item u | |
| 850 Unmark a marked entry. | |
| 851 | |
| 852 @c FIXME: Do we need `A' as well for consistency? | |
| 853 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{saferef} | |
| 854 @cindex @code{saferef}, LaTeX package | |
| 855 @item a | |
| 856 Accept the marked entries and put all labels as a comma-separated list | |
| 857 into one @emph{single} @code{\ref} macro. Some packages like | |
| 858 @file{saferef.sty} support multiple references in this way.@refill | |
| 859 | |
| 860 @item l | |
| 861 Use the last referenced label(s) again. This is equivalent to moving to | |
| 862 that label and pressing @key{RET}.@refill | |
| 863 | |
| 864 @item @key{TAB} | |
| 865 Enter a label with completion. This may also be a label which does not | |
| 866 yet exist in the document. | |
| 867 | |
| 868 @item v | |
| 869 @cindex @code{varioref}, LaTeX package | |
| 870 @cindex @code{\vref} | |
| 871 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{varioref} | |
| 872 Toggle between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref} macro for references. The | |
| 873 @code{\vref} macro is defined in the @code{varioref} LaTeX package. | |
| 874 With this key you can force @b{Ref@TeX{}} to insert a @code{\vref} | |
| 875 macro. The current state of this flag is displayed by the @samp{S<>} | |
| 876 indicator in the mode line of the selection buffer.@refill | |
| 877 | |
| 878 @item V | |
| 879 @cindex @code{fancyref}, LaTeX package | |
| 880 @cindex @code{\fref} | |
| 881 @cindex @code{\Fref} | |
| 882 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancyref} | |
| 883 Cycle between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref}. The | |
| 884 @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref} macros are defined in the @code{fancyref} | |
| 885 LaTeX package. With this key you can force @b{Ref@TeX{}} to insert a | |
| 886 @code{\fref} or @code{\Fref} macro. The current state of this flag is | |
| 887 displayed by the @samp{S<>} indicator in the mode line of the | |
| 888 selection buffer. | |
| 889 | |
| 890 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
| 891 | |
| 892 @item q | |
| 893 Exit the selection process without inserting any reference into the | |
| 894 buffer.@refill | |
| 895 | |
| 896 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
| 897 @vindex reftex-label-menu-flags | |
| 898 The defaults for the following flags can be configured with the variable | |
| 899 @code{reftex-label-menu-flags} (@pxref{Options (Referencing Labels)}). | |
| 900 | |
| 901 @item c | |
| 902 Toggle the display of the one-line label definition context in the | |
| 903 selection buffer.@refill | |
| 904 | |
| 905 @item F | |
| 906 Toggle the display of the file borders of a multifile document in the | |
| 907 selection buffer.@refill | |
| 908 | |
| 909 @item t | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
910 Toggle the display of the table of contents in the selection buffer. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
911 With prefix @var{arg}, change the maximum level of toc entries displayed |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
912 to @var{arg}. Chapters are level 1, section are level 2.@refill |
| 25829 | 913 |
| 914 @item # | |
| 915 Toggle the display of a label counter in the selection buffer.@refill | |
| 916 | |
| 917 @item % | |
| 918 Toggle the display of labels hidden in comments in the selection | |
| 919 buffers. Sometimes, you may have commented out parts of your document. | |
| 920 If these parts contain label definitions, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can still display | |
| 921 and reference these labels.@refill | |
| 922 | |
| 923 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
| 924 @item g | |
| 925 Update the menu. This will rebuilt the menu from the internal label | |
| 926 list, but not reparse the document (see @kbd{r}).@refill | |
| 927 | |
| 928 @item r | |
| 929 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
| 930 Reparse the document to update the information on all labels and rebuild | |
| 931 the menu. If the variable @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is | |
| 932 non-@code{nil} and your document is a multifile document, this will | |
| 933 reparse only a part of the document (the file in which the label at | |
| 934 point was defined).@refill | |
| 935 | |
| 936 @item C-u r | |
| 937 Reparse the @emph{entire} document. | |
| 938 | |
| 939 @item s | |
| 940 Switch the label category. After prompting for another label category, | |
| 941 a menu for that category will be shown.@refill | |
| 942 | |
| 943 @item x | |
| 944 Reference a label from an external document. With the LaTeX package | |
| 945 @code{xr} it is possible to reference labels defined in another | |
| 946 document. This key will switch to the label menu of an external | |
| 947 document and let you select a label from there (@pxref{xr (LaTeX | |
| 948 package),,xr}).@refill | |
| 949 | |
| 950 @end table | |
| 951 | |
| 952 @vindex reftex-select-label-map | |
| 953 In order to define additional commands for the selection process, the | |
| 954 keymap @code{reftex-select-label-map} may be used.@refill | |
| 955 | |
| 956 @node Builtin Label Environments, Defining Label Environments, Referencing Labels, Labels and References | |
| 957 @section Builtin Label Environments | |
| 958 @cindex Builtin label environments | |
| 959 @cindex Label environments, builtin | |
| 960 @cindex Environments, builtin | |
| 961 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
| 962 @vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin | |
| 963 | |
| 964 @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be aware of the environments which can be referenced | |
| 965 with a label (i.e. which carry their own counters). By default, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
| 966 recognizes all labeled environments and macros discussed in @cite{The | |
| 967 LaTeX Companion by Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley | |
| 968 1994.}. These are:@refill | |
| 969 | |
| 970 @itemize @minus | |
| 971 @item | |
| 972 @cindex @code{figure}, LaTeX environment | |
| 973 @cindex @code{figure*}, LaTeX environment | |
| 974 @cindex @code{table}, LaTeX environment | |
| 975 @cindex @code{table*}, LaTeX environment | |
| 976 @cindex @code{equation}, LaTeX environment | |
| 977 @cindex @code{eqnarray}, LaTeX environment | |
| 978 @cindex @code{enumerate}, LaTeX environment | |
| 979 @cindex @code{\footnote}, LaTeX macro | |
| 980 @cindex LaTeX macro @code{footnote} | |
| 981 @cindex LaTeX core | |
| 982 @code{figure}, @code{figure*}, @code{table}, @code{table*}, @code{equation}, | |
| 983 @code{eqnarray}, @code{enumerate}, the @code{\footnote} macro (this is | |
| 984 the LaTeX core stuff)@refill | |
| 985 @item | |
| 986 @cindex AMS-LaTeX | |
| 987 @cindex @code{amsmath}, LaTeX package | |
| 988 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{amsmath} | |
| 989 @cindex @code{align}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
| 990 @cindex @code{gather}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
| 991 @cindex @code{multline}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
| 992 @cindex @code{flalign}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
| 993 @cindex @code{alignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
| 994 @cindex @code{xalignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
| 995 @cindex @code{xxalignat}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
| 996 @cindex @code{subequations}, AMS-LaTeX environment | |
| 997 @code{align}, @code{gather}, @code{multline}, @code{flalign}, | |
| 998 @code{alignat}, @code{xalignat}, @code{xxalignat}, @code{subequations} | |
| 999 (from AMS-LaTeX's @file{amsmath.sty} package)@refill | |
| 1000 @item | |
| 1001 @cindex @code{endnote}, LaTeX package | |
| 1002 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{endnote} | |
| 1003 @cindex @code{\endnote}, LaTeX macro | |
| 1004 the @code{\endnote} macro (from @file{endnotes.sty}) | |
| 1005 @item | |
| 1006 @cindex @code{fancybox}, LaTeX package | |
| 1007 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancybox} | |
| 1008 @cindex @code{Beqnarray}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1009 @code{Beqnarray} (@file{fancybox.sty}) | |
| 1010 @item | |
| 1011 @cindex @code{floatfig}, LaTeX package | |
| 1012 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{floatfig} | |
| 1013 @cindex @code{floatingfig}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1014 @code{floatingfig} (@file{floatfig.sty}) | |
| 1015 @item | |
| 1016 @cindex @code{longtable}, LaTeX package | |
| 1017 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{longtable} | |
| 1018 @cindex @code{longtable}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1019 @code{longtable} (@file{longtable.sty}) | |
| 1020 @item | |
| 1021 @cindex @code{picinpar}, LaTeX package | |
| 1022 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{picinpar} | |
| 1023 @cindex @code{figwindow}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1024 @cindex @code{tabwindow}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1025 @code{figwindow}, @code{tabwindow} (@file{picinpar.sty}) | |
| 1026 @item | |
| 1027 @cindex @code{sidecap}, LaTeX package | |
| 1028 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{sidecap} | |
| 1029 @cindex @code{SCfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1030 @cindex @code{SCtable}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1031 @code{SCfigure}, @code{SCtable} (@file{sidecap.sty}) | |
| 1032 @item | |
| 1033 @cindex @code{rotating}, LaTeX package | |
| 1034 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{rotating} | |
| 1035 @cindex @code{sidewaysfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1036 @cindex @code{sidewaystable}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1037 @code{sidewaysfigure}, @code{sidewaystable} (@file{rotating.sty}) | |
| 1038 @item | |
| 1039 @cindex @code{subfig}, LaTeX package | |
| 1040 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{subfigure} | |
| 1041 @cindex @code{subfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1042 @cindex @code{subfigure*}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1043 @code{subfigure}, @code{subfigure*}, the @code{\subfigure} macro | |
| 1044 (@file{subfigure.sty})@refill | |
| 1045 @item | |
| 1046 @cindex @code{supertab}, LaTeX package | |
| 1047 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{supertab} | |
| 1048 @cindex @code{supertabular}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1049 @code{supertabular} (@file{supertab.sty}) | |
| 1050 @item | |
| 1051 @cindex @code{wrapfig}, LaTeX package | |
| 1052 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{wrapfig} | |
| 1053 @cindex @code{wrapfigure}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1054 @code{wrapfigure} (@file{wrapfig.sty}) | |
| 1055 @end itemize | |
| 1056 | |
| 1057 If you want to use other labeled environments, defined with | |
| 1058 @code{\newtheorem}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be configured to recognize | |
| 1059 them (@pxref{Defining Label Environments}).@refill | |
| 1060 | |
| 1061 @node Defining Label Environments, Reference Info, Builtin Label Environments, Labels and References | |
| 1062 @section Defining Label Environments | |
| 1063 @cindex Label environments, defining | |
| 1064 | |
| 1065 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
| 1066 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to recognize additional labeled | |
| 1067 environments and macros. This is done with the variable | |
| 1068 @code{reftex-label-alist} (@pxref{Options (Defining Label | |
| 1069 Environments)}). If you are not familiar with Lisp, you can use the | |
| 1070 @code{custom} library to configure this rather complex variable. To do | |
| 1071 this, use | |
| 1072 | |
| 1073 @example | |
| 1074 @kbd{M-x customize-variable @key{RET} reftex-label-alist @key{RET}} | |
| 1075 @end example | |
| 1076 | |
| 1077 @vindex reftex-label-alist-builtin | |
| 1078 Here we will discuss a few examples, in order to make things clearer. | |
| 1079 It can also be instructive to look at the constant | |
| 1080 @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin} which contains the entries for | |
| 1081 all the builtin environments and macros (@pxref{Builtin Label | |
| 1082 Environments}).@refill | |
| 1083 | |
| 1084 @menu | |
| 1085 * Theorem and Axiom:: Defined with @code{\newenvironment}. | |
| 1086 * Quick Equation:: When a macro sets the label type. | |
| 1087 * Figure Wrapper:: When a macro argument is a label. | |
| 1088 * Adding Magic Words:: Other words for other languages. | |
| 1089 * Using \eqref:: How to switch to this AMS-LaTeX macro. | |
| 1090 * Non-Standard Environments:: Environments without \begin and \end | |
| 1091 * Putting it Together:: How to combine many entries. | |
| 1092 @end menu | |
| 1093 | |
| 1094 @node Theorem and Axiom, Quick Equation, , Defining Label Environments | |
| 1095 @subsection Theorem and Axiom Environments | |
| 1096 @cindex @code{theorem}, newtheorem | |
| 1097 @cindex @code{axiom}, newtheorem | |
| 1098 @cindex @code{\newtheorem} | |
| 1099 | |
| 1100 Suppose you are using @code{\newtheorem} in LaTeX in order to define two | |
| 1101 new environments, @code{theorem} and @code{axiom}@refill | |
| 1102 | |
| 1103 @example | |
| 1104 \newtheorem@{axiom@}@{Axiom@} | |
| 1105 \newtheorem@{theorem@}@{Theorem@} | |
| 1106 @end example | |
| 1107 | |
| 1108 @noindent | |
| 1109 to be used like this: | |
| 1110 | |
| 1111 @example | |
| 1112 \begin@{axiom@} | |
| 1113 \label@{ax:first@} | |
| 1114 .... | |
| 1115 \end@{axiom@} | |
| 1116 @end example | |
| 1117 | |
| 1118 So we need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that @code{theorem} and @code{axiom} are new | |
| 1119 labeled environments which define their own label categories. We can | |
| 1120 either use Lisp to do this (e.g. in @file{.emacs}) or use the custom | |
| 1121 library. With Lisp it would look like this | |
| 1122 | |
| 1123 @lisp | |
| 1124 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1125 '(("axiom" ?a "ax:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("axiom" "ax.") -2) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1126 ("theorem" ?h "thr:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t ("theorem" "th.") -3))) |
| 25829 | 1127 @end lisp |
| 1128 | |
| 1129 The type indicator characters @code{?a} and @code{?h} are used for | |
| 1130 prompts when @b{Ref@TeX{}} queries for a label type. @code{?h} | |
| 1131 was chosen for @code{theorem} since @code{?t} is already taken by | |
| 1132 @code{table}. Note that also @code{?s}, @code{?f}, @code{?e}, | |
| 1133 @code{?i}, @code{?n} are already used for standard environments.@refill | |
| 1134 | |
| 1135 @noindent | |
| 1136 The labels for Axioms and Theorems will have the prefixes @samp{ax:} and | |
| 1137 @samp{thr:}, respectively. @xref{AUCTeX}, for information on how | |
| 1138 AUCTeX can use @b{Ref@TeX{}} to automatically create labels when a new | |
| 1139 environment is inserted into a buffer.@refill | |
| 1140 | |
| 1141 @noindent | |
| 1142 The @samp{~\ref@{%s@}} is a format string indicating how to insert | |
| 1143 references to these labels.@refill | |
| 1144 | |
| 1145 @noindent | |
| 1146 The next item indicates how to grab context of the label definition.@refill | |
| 1147 @itemize @minus | |
| 1148 @item | |
| 1149 @code{t} means to get it from a default location (from the beginning of | |
| 1150 a @code{\macro} or after the @code{\begin} statement). @code{t} is | |
| 1151 @emph{not} a good choice for eqnarray and similar environments.@refill | |
| 1152 @item | |
| 1153 @code{nil} means to use the text right after the label definition.@refill | |
| 1154 @item | |
| 1155 For more complex ways of getting context, see the variable | |
| 1156 @code{reftex-label-alist} (@ref{Options (Defining Label | |
| 1157 Environments)}).@refill | |
| 1158 @end itemize | |
| 1159 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1160 The following list of strings is used to guess the correct label type |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1161 from the word before point when creating a reference. E.g. if you |
| 25829 | 1162 write: @samp{As we have shown in Theorem} and then press @kbd{C-c )}, |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1163 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will know that you are looking for a theorem label and |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1164 restrict the menu to only these labels without even asking.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1165 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1166 The final item in each entry is the level at which the environment |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1167 should produce entries in the table of context buffer. If the number is |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1168 positive, the environment will produce numbered entries (like |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1169 @code{\section}), if it is negative the entries will be unnumbered (like |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1170 @code{\section*}). Use this only for environments which structure the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1171 document similar to sectioning commands. For everything else, omit the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1172 item.@refill |
| 25829 | 1173 |
| 1174 To do the same configuration with @code{customize}, you need to click on | |
| 1175 the @code{[INS]} button twice to create two templates and fill them in | |
| 1176 like this:@refill | |
| 1177 | |
| 1178 @example | |
| 1179 Reftex Label Alist: [Hide] | |
| 1180 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
| 1181 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: axiom | |
| 1182 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : a | |
| 1183 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] String: ax: | |
| 1184 Label reference format: [Value Menu] String: ~\ref@{%s@} | |
| 1185 Context method : [Value Menu] After label | |
| 1186 Magic words: | |
| 1187 [INS] [DEL] String: axiom | |
| 1188 [INS] [DEL] String: ax. | |
| 1189 [INS] | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1190 [X] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] Level: -2 |
| 25829 | 1191 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: |
| 1192 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: theorem | |
| 1193 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : h | |
| 1194 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] String: thr: | |
| 1195 Label reference format: [Value Menu] String: ~\ref@{%s@} | |
| 1196 Context method : [Value Menu] Default position | |
| 1197 Magic words: | |
| 1198 [INS] [DEL] String: theorem | |
| 1199 [INS] [DEL] String: theor. | |
| 1200 [INS] [DEL] String: th. | |
| 1201 [INS] | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1202 [X] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] Level: -3 |
| 25829 | 1203 @end example |
| 1204 | |
| 1205 @vindex reftex-insert-label-flags | |
| 1206 @vindex reftex-label-menu-flags | |
| 1207 Depending on how you would like the label insertion and selection for | |
| 1208 the new environments to work, you might want to add the letters @samp{a} | |
| 1209 and @samp{h} to some of the flags in the variables | |
| 1210 @code{reftex-insert-label-flags} (@pxref{Options (Creating Labels)}) | |
| 1211 and @code{reftex-label-menu-flags} (@pxref{Options (Referencing | |
| 1212 Labels)}).@refill | |
| 1213 | |
| 1214 | |
| 1215 @node Quick Equation, Figure Wrapper, Theorem and Axiom , Defining Label Environments | |
| 1216 @subsection Quick Equation Macro | |
| 1217 @cindex Quick equation macro | |
| 1218 @cindex Macros as environment wrappers | |
| 1219 | |
| 1220 Suppose you would like to have a macro for quick equations. It | |
| 1221 could be defined like this: | |
| 1222 | |
| 1223 @example | |
| 1224 \newcommand@{\quickeq@}[1]@{\begin@{equation@} #1 \end@{equation@}@} | |
| 1225 @end example | |
| 1226 | |
| 1227 @noindent | |
| 1228 and used like this: | |
| 1229 | |
| 1230 @example | |
| 1231 Einstein's equation is \quickeq@{E=mc^2 \label@{eq:einstein@}@}. | |
| 1232 @end example | |
| 1233 | |
| 1234 We need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that any label defined in the argument of the | |
| 1235 @code{\quickeq} is an equation label. Here is how to do this with lisp: | |
| 1236 | |
| 1237 @lisp | |
| 1238 (setq reftex-label-alist '(("\\quickeq@{@}" ?e nil nil 1 nil))) | |
| 1239 @end lisp | |
| 1240 | |
| 1241 The first element in this list is now the macro with empty braces as an | |
| 1242 @emph{image} of the macro arguments. @code{?e} indicates that this is | |
| 1243 an equation label, the different @code{nil} elements indicate to use the | |
| 1244 default values for equations. The @samp{1} as the fifth element | |
| 1245 indicates that the context of the label definition should be the 1st | |
| 1246 argument of the macro.@refill | |
| 1247 | |
| 1248 Here is again how this would look in the customization buffer: | |
| 1249 | |
| 1250 @example | |
| 1251 Reftex Label Alist: [Hide] | |
| 1252 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
| 1253 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: \quickeq@{@} | |
| 1254 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : e | |
| 1255 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] Default | |
| 1256 Label reference format: [Value Menu] Default | |
| 1257 Context method : [Value Menu] Macro arg nr: 1 | |
| 1258 Magic words: | |
| 1259 [INS] | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1260 [ ] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] No entry |
| 25829 | 1261 @end example |
| 1262 | |
| 1263 @node Figure Wrapper, Adding Magic Words, Quick Equation, Defining Label Environments | |
| 1264 @subsection Figure Wrapping Macro | |
| 1265 @cindex Macros as environment wrappers | |
| 1266 @cindex Figure wrapping macro | |
| 1267 | |
| 1268 Suppose you want to make figures not directly with the figure | |
| 1269 environment, but with a macro like | |
| 1270 | |
| 1271 @example | |
| 1272 \newcommand@{\myfig@}[5][tbp]@{% | |
| 1273 \begin@{figure@}[#1] | |
| 1274 \epsimp[#5]@{#2@} | |
| 1275 \caption@{#3@} | |
| 1276 \label@{#4@} | |
| 1277 \end@{figure@}@} | |
| 1278 @end example | |
| 1279 | |
| 1280 @noindent | |
| 1281 which would be called like | |
| 1282 | |
| 1283 @example | |
| 1284 \myfig[htp]@{filename@}@{caption text@}@{label@}@{1@} | |
| 1285 @end example | |
| 1286 | |
| 1287 Now we need to tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} that the 4th argument of the | |
| 1288 @code{\myfig} macro @emph{is itself} a figure label, and where to find | |
| 1289 the context.@refill | |
| 1290 | |
| 1291 @lisp | |
| 1292 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
| 1293 '(("\\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}" ?f nil nil 3))) | |
| 1294 @end lisp | |
| 1295 | |
| 1296 The empty pairs of brackets indicate the different arguments of the | |
| 1297 @code{\myfig} macro. The @samp{*} marks the label argument. @code{?f} | |
| 1298 indicates that this is a figure label which will be listed together with | |
| 1299 labels from normal figure environments. The @code{nil} entries for | |
| 1300 prefix and reference format mean to use the defaults for figure labels. | |
| 1301 The @samp{3} for the context method means to grab the 3rd macro argument | |
| 1302 - the caption.@refill | |
| 1303 | |
| 1304 As a side effect of this configuration, @code{reftex-label} will now | |
| 1305 insert the required naked label (without the @code{\label} macro) when | |
| 1306 point is directly after the opening parenthesis of a @code{\myfig} macro | |
| 1307 argument.@refill | |
| 1308 | |
| 1309 Again, here the configuration in the customization buffer: | |
| 1310 | |
| 1311 @example | |
| 1312 [INS] [DEL] Package or Detailed : [Value Menu] Detailed: | |
| 1313 Environment or \macro : [Value Menu] String: \myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@} | |
| 1314 Type specification : [Value Menu] Char : f | |
| 1315 Label prefix string : [Value Menu] Default | |
| 1316 Label reference format: [Value Menu] Default | |
| 1317 Context method : [Value Menu] Macro arg nr: 3 | |
| 1318 Magic words: | |
| 1319 [INS] | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1320 [ ] Make TOC entry : [Value Menu] No entry |
| 25829 | 1321 @end example |
| 1322 | |
| 1323 @node Adding Magic Words, Using \eqref, Figure Wrapper, Defining Label Environments | |
| 1324 @subsection Adding Magic Words | |
| 1325 @cindex Magic words | |
| 1326 @cindex German magic words | |
| 1327 @cindex Label category | |
| 1328 | |
| 1329 Sometimes you don't want to define a new label environment or macro, but | |
| 1330 just change the information associated with a label category. Maybe you | |
| 1331 want to add some magic words, for another language. Changing only the | |
| 1332 information associated with a label category is done by giving | |
| 1333 @code{nil} for the environment name and then specify the items you want | |
| 1334 to define. Here is an example which adds German magic words to all | |
| 1335 predefined label categories.@refill | |
| 1336 | |
| 1337 @lisp | |
| 1338 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
| 1339 '((nil ?s nil nil nil ("Kapitel" "Kap." "Abschnitt" "Teil")) | |
| 1340 (nil ?e nil nil nil ("Gleichung" "Gl.")) | |
| 1341 (nil ?t nil nil nil ("Tabelle")) | |
| 1342 (nil ?f nil nil nil ("Figur" "Abbildung" "Abb.")) | |
| 1343 (nil ?n nil nil nil ("Anmerkung" "Anm.")) | |
| 1344 (nil ?i nil nil nil ("Punkt")))) | |
| 1345 @end lisp | |
| 1346 | |
| 1347 @node Using \eqref, Non-Standard Environments, Adding Magic Words, Defining Label Environments | |
| 1348 @subsection Using @code{\eqref} | |
| 1349 @cindex @code{\eqref}, AMS-LaTeX macro | |
| 1350 @cindex AMS-LaTeX | |
| 1351 @cindex Label category | |
| 1352 | |
| 1353 Another case where one only wants to change the information associated | |
| 1354 with the label category is to change the macro which is used for | |
| 1355 referencing the label. When working with the AMS-LaTeX stuff, you might | |
| 1356 prefer @code{\eqref} for doing equation references. Here is how to | |
| 1357 do this: | |
| 1358 | |
| 1359 @lisp | |
| 1360 (setq reftex-label-alist '((nil ?e nil "~\\eqref@{%s@}" nil nil))) | |
| 1361 @end lisp | |
| 1362 | |
| 1363 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has also a predefined symbol for this special purpose. The | |
| 1364 following is equivalent to the line above.@refill | |
| 1365 | |
| 1366 @lisp | |
| 1367 (setq reftex-label-alist '(AMSTeX)) | |
| 1368 @end lisp | |
| 1369 | |
| 1370 Note that this is automatically done by the @file{amsmath.el} style file | |
| 1371 of AUCTeX (@pxref{Style Files}) - so if you use AUCTeX, | |
| 1372 this configuration will not be necessary.@refill | |
| 1373 | |
| 1374 @node Non-Standard Environments, Putting it Together, Using \eqref, Defining Label Environments | |
| 1375 @subsection Non-standard Environments | |
| 1376 @cindex Non-standard environments | |
| 1377 @cindex Environments without @code{\begin} | |
| 1378 @cindex Special parser functions | |
| 1379 @cindex Parser functions, for special environments | |
| 1380 | |
| 1381 Some LaTeX packages define environment-like structures without using the | |
| 1382 standard @samp{\begin..\end} structure. @b{Ref@TeX{}} cannot parse | |
| 1383 these directly, but you can write your own special-purpose parser and | |
| 1384 use it instead of the name of an environment in an entry for | |
| 1385 @code{reftex-label-alist}. The function should check if point is | |
| 1386 currently in the special environment it was written to detect. If so, | |
| 1387 it must return a buffer position indicating the start of this | |
| 1388 environment. The return value must be @code{nil} on failure to detect | |
| 1389 the environment. The function is called with one argument @var{bound}. | |
| 1390 If non-@code{nil}, @var{bound} is a boundary for backwards searches | |
| 1391 which should be observed. We will discuss two examples.@refill | |
| 1392 | |
| 1393 @cindex LaTeX commands, abbreviated | |
| 1394 | |
| 1395 Some people define abbreviations for | |
| 1396 environments, like @code{\be} for @code{\begin@{equation@}}, and | |
| 1397 @code{\ee} for @code{\end@{equation@}}. The parser function would have | |
| 1398 to search backward for these macros. When the first match is | |
| 1399 @code{\ee}, point is not in this environment. When the first match is | |
| 1400 @code{\be}, point is in this environment and the function must return | |
| 1401 the beginning of the match. To avoid scanning too far, we can also look | |
| 1402 for empty lines which cannot occure inside an equation environment. | |
| 1403 Here is the setup:@refill | |
| 1404 | |
| 1405 @lisp | |
| 1406 ;; Setup entry in reftex-label-alist, using all defaults for equations | |
| 1407 (setq reftex-label-alist '((detect-be-ee ?e nil nil nil nil))) | |
| 1408 | |
| 1409 (defun detect-be-ee (bound) | |
| 1410 ;; Search backward for the macros or an empty line | |
| 1411 (if (re-search-backward | |
| 1412 "\\(^[ \t]*\n\\|\\\\ee\\>\\)\\|\\(\\\\be\\>\\)" bound t) | |
| 1413 (if (match-beginning 2) | |
| 1414 (match-beginning 2) ; Return start of environment | |
| 1415 nil) ; Return nil because env is closed | |
| 1416 nil)) ; Return nil for not found | |
| 1417 @end lisp | |
| 1418 | |
| 1419 @cindex @code{linguex}, LaTeX package | |
| 1420 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{linguex} | |
| 1421 A more complex example is the @file{linguex.sty} package which defines | |
| 1422 list macros @samp{\ex.}, @samp{\a.}, @samp{\b.} etc. for lists which are | |
| 1423 terminated by @samp{\z.} or by an empty line.@refill | |
| 1424 | |
| 1425 @example | |
| 1426 \ex. \label@{ex:12@} Some text in an exotic language ... | |
| 1427 \a. \label@{ex:13@} more stuff | |
| 1428 \b. \label@{ex:14@} still more stuff | |
| 1429 \a. List on a deeper level | |
| 1430 \b. Another item | |
| 1431 \b. and the third one | |
| 1432 \z. | |
| 1433 \b. Third item on this level. | |
| 1434 | |
| 1435 ... text after the empty line terminating all lists | |
| 1436 @end example | |
| 1437 | |
| 1438 The difficulty is that the @samp{\a.} lists can nest and that an empty | |
| 1439 line terminates all list levels in one go. So we have to count nesting | |
| 1440 levels between @samp{\a.} and @samp{\z.}. Here is the implementation | |
| 1441 for @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
| 1442 | |
| 1443 @lisp | |
| 1444 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
| 1445 '((detect-linguex ?x "ex:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("Example" "Ex.")))) | |
| 1446 | |
| 1447 (defun detect-linguex (bound) | |
| 1448 (let ((cnt 0)) | |
| 1449 (catch 'exit | |
| 1450 (while | |
| 1451 ;; Search backward for all possible delimiters | |
| 1452 (re-search-backward | |
| 1453 (concat "\\(^[ \t]*\n\\)\\|\\(\\\\z\\.\\)\\|" | |
| 1454 "\\(\\ex[ig]?\\.\\)\\|\\(\\\\a\\.\\)") | |
| 1455 nil t) | |
| 1456 ;; Check which delimiter was matched. | |
| 1457 (cond | |
| 1458 ((match-beginning 1) | |
| 1459 ;; empty line terminates all - return nil | |
| 1460 (throw 'exit nil)) | |
| 1461 ((match-beginning 2) | |
| 1462 ;; \z. terminates one list level - decrease nesting count | |
| 1463 (decf cnt)) | |
| 1464 ((match-beginning 3) | |
| 1465 ;; \ex. : return match unless there was a \z. on this level | |
| 1466 (throw 'exit (if (>= cnt 0) (match-beginning 3) nil))) | |
| 1467 ((match-beginning 4) | |
| 1468 ;; \a. : return match when on level 0, otherwise | |
| 1469 ;; increment nesting count | |
| 1470 (if (>= cnt 0) | |
| 1471 (throw 'exit (match-beginning 4)) | |
| 1472 (incf cnt)))))))) | |
| 1473 @end lisp | |
| 1474 | |
| 1475 @node Putting it Together, , Non-Standard Environments, Defining Label Environments | |
| 1476 @subsection Putting it all together | |
| 1477 | |
| 1478 When you have to put several entries into @code{reftex-label-alist}, just | |
| 1479 put them after each other in a list, or create that many templates in | |
| 1480 the customization buffer. Here is a lisp example which uses several of | |
| 1481 the entries described above: | |
| 1482 | |
| 1483 @lisp | |
| 1484 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1485 '(("axiom" ?a "ax:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("axiom" "ax.") -2) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1486 ("theorem" ?h "thr:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t ("theorem" "theor." "th.") -3) |
| 25829 | 1487 ("\\quickeq@{@}" ?e nil nil 1 nil) |
| 1488 AMSTeX | |
| 1489 ("\\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}" ?f nil nil 3) | |
| 1490 (detect-linguex ?x "ex:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" nil ("Example" "Ex.")))) | |
| 1491 @end lisp | |
| 1492 | |
| 1493 @node Reference Info, xr (LaTeX package), Defining Label Environments, Labels and References | |
| 1494 @section Reference Info | |
| 1495 @findex reftex-view-crossref | |
| 1496 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
| 1497 @cindex Cross-references, displaying | |
| 1498 @cindex Reference info | |
| 1499 @cindex Displaying cross-references | |
| 1500 @cindex Viewing cross-references | |
| 1501 @kindex C-c & | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1502 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
| 25829 | 1503 |
| 1504 When point is idle on the argument of a @code{\ref} macro, the echo area | |
| 1505 will display some information about the label referenced there. Note | |
| 1506 that the information is only displayed if the echo area is not occupied | |
| 1507 by a different message. | |
| 1508 | |
| 1509 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can also display the label definition corresponding to a | |
| 1510 @code{\ref} macro, or all reference locations corresponding to a | |
| 1511 @code{\label} macro. @xref{Viewing Cross-References}, for more | |
| 1512 information.@refill | |
| 1513 | |
| 1514 @node xr (LaTeX package), varioref (LaTeX package), Reference Info, Labels and References | |
| 1515 @section @code{xr}: Cross-Document References | |
| 1516 @cindex @code{xr}, LaTeX package | |
| 1517 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{xr} | |
| 1518 @cindex @code{\externaldocument} | |
| 1519 @cindex External documents | |
| 1520 @cindex References to external documents | |
| 1521 @cindex Cross-document references | |
| 1522 | |
| 1523 The LaTeX package @code{xr} makes it possible to create references to | |
| 1524 labels defined in external documents. The preamble of a document using | |
| 1525 @code{xr} will contain something like this:@refill | |
| 1526 | |
| 1527 @example | |
| 1528 \usepackage@{xr@} | |
| 1529 \externaldocument[V1-]@{volume1@} | |
| 1530 \externaldocument[V3-]@{volume3@} | |
| 1531 @end example | |
| 1532 | |
| 1533 @noindent | |
| 1534 and we can make references to any labels defined in these | |
| 1535 external documents by using the prefixes @samp{V1-} and @samp{V3-}, | |
| 1536 respectively.@refill | |
| 1537 | |
| 1538 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be used to create such references as well. Start the | |
| 1539 referencing process normally, by pressing @kbd{C-c )}. Select a label | |
| 1540 type if necessary. When you see the label selection buffer, pressing | |
| 1541 @kbd{x} will switch to the label selection buffer of one of the external | |
| 1542 documents. You may then select a label as before and @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
| 1543 insert it along with the required prefix.@refill | |
| 1544 | |
| 1545 For this kind of inter-document cross-references, saving of parsing | |
| 1546 information and the use of multiple selection buffers can mean a large | |
| 1547 speed-up (@pxref{Optimizations}).@refill | |
| 1548 | |
| 1549 @node varioref (LaTeX package), fancyref (LaTeX package), xr (LaTeX package), Labels and References | |
| 1550 @section @code{varioref}: Variable Page References | |
| 1551 @cindex @code{varioref}, LaTeX package | |
| 1552 @cindex @code{\vref} | |
| 1553 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{varioref} | |
| 1554 @vindex reftex-vref-is-default | |
| 1555 @code{varioref} is a frequently used LaTeX package to create | |
| 1556 cross--references with page information. When you want to make a | |
| 1557 reference with the @code{\vref} macro, just press the @kbd{v} key in the | |
| 1558 selection buffer to toggle between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref} | |
| 1559 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). The mode line of the selection buffer | |
| 1560 shows the current status of this switch. If you find that you almost | |
| 1561 always use @code{\vref}, you may want to make it the default by | |
| 1562 customizing the variable @code{reftex-vref-is-default}. If this | |
| 1563 toggling seems too inconvenient, you can also use the command | |
| 1564 @code{reftex-varioref-vref}@footnote{bind it to @kbd{C-c v}.}. | |
| 1565 Or use AUCTeX to create your macros (@pxref{AUCTeX}).@refill | |
| 1566 | |
| 1567 @node fancyref (LaTeX package), , varioref (LaTeX package), Labels and References | |
| 1568 @section @code{fancyref}: Fancy Cross References | |
| 1569 @cindex @code{fancyref}, LaTeX package | |
| 1570 @cindex @code{\fref} | |
| 1571 @cindex @code{\Fref} | |
| 1572 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{fancyref} | |
| 1573 @vindex reftex-fref-is-default | |
| 1574 @code{fancyref} is a LaTeX package where a macro call like | |
| 1575 @code{\fref@{@var{fig:map-of-germany}@}} creates not only the number of | |
| 1576 the referenced counter but also the complete text around it, like | |
| 1577 @samp{Figure 3 on the preceding page}. In order to make it work you | |
| 1578 need to use label prefixes like @samp{fig:} consistently - something | |
| 1579 @b{Ref@TeX{}} does automatically. When you want to make a reference | |
| 1580 with the @code{\fref} macro, just press the @kbd{V} key in the selection | |
| 1581 buffer to cycle between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref} | |
| 1582 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}). The mode line of the selection buffer | |
| 1583 shows the current status of this switch. If this cycling seems | |
| 1584 inconvenient, you can also use the commands @code{reftex-fancyref-fref} | |
| 1585 and @code{reftex-fancyref-Fref}@footnote{bind them to @kbd{C-c | |
| 1586 f} and @kbd{C-c F}.}. Or use AUCTeX to create your macros | |
| 1587 (@pxref{AUCTeX}).@refill | |
| 1588 | |
| 1589 @node Citations, Index Support, Labels and References, Top | |
| 1590 @chapter Citations | |
| 1591 @cindex Citations | |
| 1592 @cindex @code{\cite} | |
| 1593 | |
| 1594 Citations in LaTeX are done with the @code{\cite} macro or variations of | |
| 1595 it. The argument of the macro is a citation key which identifies an | |
| 1596 article or book in either a BibTeX database file or in an explicit | |
| 1597 @code{thebibliography} environment in the document. @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s | |
| 1598 support for citations helps to select the correct key quickly.@refill | |
| 1599 | |
| 1600 @menu | |
| 1601 * Creating Citations:: How to create them. | |
| 1602 * Citation Styles:: Natbib, Harvard, Chicago and Co. | |
| 1603 * Citation Info:: View the corresponding database entry. | |
| 1604 * Chapterbib and Bibunits:: Multiple bibliographies in a Document. | |
| 1605 * Citations Outside LaTeX:: How to make citations in Emails etc. | |
| 1606 @end menu | |
| 1607 | |
| 1608 @node Creating Citations, Citation Styles, , Citations | |
| 1609 @section Creating Citations | |
| 1610 @cindex Creating citations | |
| 1611 @cindex Citations, creating | |
| 1612 @findex reftex-citation | |
| 1613 @kindex C-c [ | |
| 1614 @cindex Selection buffer, citations | |
| 1615 @cindex Selection process | |
| 1616 | |
| 1617 In order to create a citation, press @kbd{C-c [}. @b{Ref@TeX{}} then | |
| 1618 prompts for a regular expression which will be used to search through | |
| 1619 the database and present the list of matches to choose from in a | |
| 1620 selection process similar to that for selecting labels | |
| 1621 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}).@refill | |
| 1622 | |
| 1623 The regular expression uses an extended syntax: @samp{&&} defines a | |
| 1624 logic @code{and} for regular expressions. For example | |
| 1625 @samp{Einstein&&Bose} will match all articles which mention | |
| 1626 Bose-Einstein condensation, or which are co-authored by Bose and | |
| 1627 Einstein. When entering the regular expression, you can complete on | |
| 1628 known citation keys.@refill | |
| 1629 | |
| 1630 @cindex @code{\bibliography} | |
| 1631 @cindex @code{thebibliography}, LaTeX environment | |
| 1632 @cindex @code{BIBINPUTS}, environment variable | |
| 1633 @cindex @code{TEXBIB}, environment variable | |
| 1634 @b{Ref@TeX{}} prefers to use BibTeX database files specified with a | |
| 1635 @code{\bibliography} macro to collect its information. Just like | |
| 1636 BibTeX, it will search for the specified files in the current directory | |
| 1637 and along the path given in the environment variable @code{BIBINPUTS}. | |
| 1638 If you do not use BibTeX, but the document contains an explicit | |
| 1639 @code{thebibliography} environment, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will collect its | |
| 1640 information from there. Note that in this case the information | |
| 1641 presented in the selection buffer will just be a copy of relevant | |
| 1642 @code{\bibitem} entries, not the structured listing available with | |
| 1643 BibTeX database files.@refill | |
| 1644 | |
| 1645 @kindex ? | |
| 1646 In the selection buffer, the following keys provide special commands. A | |
| 1647 summary of this information is always available from the selection | |
| 1648 process by pressing @kbd{?}.@refill | |
| 1649 | |
| 1650 @table @kbd | |
| 1651 @tablesubheading{General} | |
| 1652 @item ? | |
| 1653 Show a summary of available commands. | |
| 1654 | |
| 1655 @item 0-9,- | |
| 1656 Prefix argument. | |
| 1657 | |
| 1658 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
| 1659 @item n | |
| 1660 Go to next article. | |
| 1661 | |
| 1662 @item p | |
| 1663 Go to previous article. | |
| 1664 | |
| 1665 @tablesubheading{Access to full database entries} | |
| 1666 @item @key{SPC} | |
| 1667 Show the database entry corresponding to the article at point, in | |
| 1668 another window. See also the @kbd{f} key.@refill | |
| 1669 | |
| 1670 @item f | |
| 1671 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
| 1672 always display the full database entry of the current article. This is | |
| 1673 equivalent to pressing @key{SPC} after each cursor motion. With BibTeX | |
| 1674 entries, follow mode can be rather slow.@refill | |
| 1675 | |
| 1676 @tablesubheading{Selecting entries and creating the citation} | |
| 1677 @item @key{RET} | |
| 1678 Insert a citation referencing the article at point into the buffer from | |
| 1679 which the selection process was started.@refill | |
| 1680 | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1681 @item mouse-2 |
| 25829 | 1682 @vindex reftex-highlight-selection |
| 1683 Clicking with mouse button 2 on a citation will accept it like @key{RET} | |
| 1684 would. See also variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}, @ref{Options | |
| 1685 (Misc)}.@refill | |
| 1686 | |
| 1687 @item m | |
| 1688 Mark the current entry. When one or several entries are marked, | |
| 1689 pressing @kbd{a} or @kbd{A} accepts all marked entries. Also, | |
| 1690 @key{RET} behaves like the @kbd{a} key. | |
| 1691 | |
| 1692 @item u | |
| 1693 Unmark a marked entry. | |
| 1694 | |
| 1695 @item a | |
| 1696 Accept all (marked) entries in the selection buffer and create a single | |
| 1697 @code{\cite} macro referring to them.@refill | |
| 1698 | |
| 1699 @item A | |
| 1700 Accept all (marked) entries in the selection buffer and create a | |
| 1701 separate @code{\cite} macro for each of it.@refill | |
| 1702 | |
| 1703 @item @key{TAB} | |
| 1704 Enter a citation key with completion. This may also be a key which does | |
| 1705 not yet exist. | |
| 1706 | |
| 1707 @item . | |
| 1708 Show insertion point in another window. This is the point from where you | |
| 1709 called @code{reftex-citation}.@refill | |
| 1710 | |
| 1711 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
| 1712 @item q | |
| 1713 Exit the selection process without inserting a citation into the | |
| 1714 buffer.@refill | |
| 1715 | |
| 1716 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
| 1717 | |
| 1718 @item g | |
| 1719 Start over with a new regular expression. The full database will be | |
| 1720 rescanned with the new expression (see also @kbd{r}).@refill | |
| 1721 | |
| 1722 @c FIXME: Should we use something else here? r is usually rescan! | |
| 1723 @item r | |
| 1724 Refine the current selection with another regular expression. This will | |
| 1725 @emph{not} rescan the entire database, but just the already selected | |
| 1726 entries.@refill | |
| 1727 | |
| 1728 @end table | |
| 1729 | |
| 1730 @vindex reftex-select-bib-map | |
| 1731 In order to define additional commands for this selection process, the | |
| 1732 keymap @code{reftex-select-bib-map} may be used.@refill | |
| 1733 | |
| 1734 @node Citation Styles, Citation Info, Creating Citations, Citations | |
| 1735 @section Citation Styles | |
| 1736 @cindex Citation styles | |
| 1737 @cindex Citation styles, @code{natbib} | |
| 1738 @cindex Citation styles, @code{harvard} | |
| 1739 @cindex Citation styles, @code{chicago} | |
| 1740 @cindex @code{natbib}, citation style | |
| 1741 @cindex @code{harvard}, citation style | |
| 1742 @cindex @code{chicago}, citation style | |
| 1743 | |
| 1744 @vindex reftex-cite-format | |
| 1745 The standard LaTeX macro @code{\cite} works well with numeric or simple | |
| 1746 key citations. To deal with the more complex task of author-year | |
| 1747 citations as used in many natural sciences, a variety of packages has | |
| 1748 been developed which define derived forms of the @code{\cite} macro. | |
| 1749 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to produce these citation macros as well by | |
| 1750 setting the variable @code{reftex-cite-format}. For the most commonly | |
| 1751 used packages (@code{natbib}, @code{harvard}, @code{chicago}) this may | |
| 1752 be done from the menu, under @code{Ref->Citation Styles}. Since there | |
| 1753 are usually several macros to create the citations, executing | |
| 1754 @code{reftex-citation} (@kbd{C-c [}) starts by prompting for the correct | |
| 1755 macro. For the Natbib style, this looks like this: | |
| 1756 | |
| 1757 @example | |
| 1758 SELECT A CITATION FORMAT | |
| 1759 | |
| 1760 [^M] \cite@{%l@} | |
| 1761 [t] \citet@{%l@} | |
| 1762 [T] \citet*@{%l@} | |
| 1763 [p] \citep@{%l@} | |
| 1764 [P] \citep*@{%l@} | |
| 1765 [e] \citep[e.g.][]@{%l@} | |
| 1766 [s] \citep[see][]@{%l@} | |
| 1767 [a] \citeauthor@{%l@} | |
| 1768 [A] \citeauthor*@{%l@} | |
| 1769 [y] \citeyear@{%l@} | |
| 1770 @end example | |
| 1771 | |
| 1772 Following the most generic of these packages, @code{natbib}, the builtin | |
| 1773 citation packages always accept the @kbd{t} key for a @emph{textual} | |
| 1774 citation (like: @code{Jones et al. (1997) have shown...}) as well as | |
| 1775 the @kbd{p} key for a parenthetical citation (like: @code{As shown | |
| 1776 earlier (Jones et al, 1997)}).@refill | |
| 1777 | |
| 1778 To make one of these styles the default, customize the variable | |
| 1779 @code{reftex-cite-format} or put into @file{.emacs}: | |
| 1780 | |
| 1781 @lisp | |
| 1782 (setq reftex-cite-format 'natbib) | |
| 1783 @end lisp | |
| 1784 | |
| 1785 You can also use AUCTeX style files to automatically set the | |
| 1786 citation style based on the @code{usepackage} commands in a given | |
| 1787 document. @xref{Style Files}, for information on how to set up the style | |
| 1788 files correctly.@refill | |
| 1789 | |
| 1790 @node Citation Info, Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citation Styles, Citations, Top | |
| 1791 @section Citation Info | |
| 1792 @cindex Displaying citations | |
| 1793 @cindex Citations, displaying | |
| 1794 @cindex Citation info | |
| 1795 @cindex Viewing citations | |
| 1796 @kindex C-c & | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
1797 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
| 25829 | 1798 @findex reftex-view-crossref |
| 1799 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
| 1800 | |
| 1801 When point is idle on the argument of a @code{\cite} macro, the echo area | |
| 1802 will display some information about the article cited there. Note | |
| 1803 that the information is only displayed if the echo area is not occupied | |
| 1804 by a different message. | |
| 1805 | |
| 1806 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can also display the @code{\bibitem} or BibTeX database | |
| 1807 entry corresponding to a @code{\cite} macro, or all citation locations | |
| 1808 corresponding to a @code{\bibitem} or BibTeX database entry. | |
| 1809 @xref{Viewing Cross-References}.@refill | |
| 1810 | |
| 1811 @node Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citations Outside LaTeX, Citation Info, Citations | |
| 1812 @section Chapterbib and Bibunits | |
| 1813 @cindex @code{chapterbib}, LaTeX package | |
| 1814 @cindex @code{bibunits}, LaTeX package | |
| 1815 @cindex Bibliographies, multiple | |
| 1816 | |
| 1817 @code{chapterbib} and @code{bibunits} are two LaTeX packages which | |
| 1818 produce multiple bibliographies in a document. This is no problem for | |
| 1819 @b{Ref@TeX{}} as long as all bibliographies use the same BibTeX database | |
| 1820 files. If they do not, it is best to have each document part in a | |
| 1821 separate file (as it is required for @code{chapterbib} anyway). Then | |
| 1822 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will still scan the locally relevant databases correctly. If | |
| 1823 you have multiple bibliographies within a @emph{single file}, this may | |
| 1824 or may not be the case. | |
| 1825 | |
| 1826 @node Citations Outside LaTeX, , Chapterbib and Bibunits, Citations | |
| 1827 @section Citations outside LaTeX | |
| 1828 @cindex Citations outside LaTeX | |
| 1829 @vindex reftex-default-bibliography | |
| 1830 | |
| 1831 The command @code{reftex-citation} can also be executed outside a LaTeX | |
| 1832 buffer. This can be useful to reference articles in the mail buffer and | |
| 1833 other documents. You should @emph{not} enter @code{reftex-mode} for | |
| 1834 this, just execute the command. The list of BibTeX files will in this | |
| 1835 case be taken from the variable @code{reftex-default-bibliography}. | |
| 1836 Setting the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} to the symbol | |
| 1837 @code{locally} does a decent job of putting all relevant information | |
| 1838 about a citation directly into the buffer. Here is the lisp code to add | |
| 1839 the @kbd{C-c [} binding to the mail buffer. It also provides a local | |
| 1840 binding for @code{reftex-cite-format}.@refill | |
| 1841 | |
| 1842 @lisp | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1843 (add-hook 'mail-setup-hook |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1844 (lambda () (define-key mail-mode-map "\C-c[" |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1845 (lambda () (interactive) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1846 (require 'reftex) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1847 (let ((reftex-cite-format 'locally)) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1848 (reftex-citation)))))) |
| 25829 | 1849 @end lisp |
| 1850 | |
| 1851 @node Index Support, Viewing Cross-References, Citations, Top | |
| 1852 @chapter Index Support | |
| 1853 @cindex Index Support | |
| 1854 @cindex @code{\index} | |
| 1855 | |
| 1856 LaTeX has builtin support for creating an Index. The LaTeX core | |
| 1857 supports two different indices, the standard index and a glossary. With | |
| 1858 the help of special LaTeX packages (@file{multind.sty} or | |
| 1859 @file{index.sty}), any number of indices can be supported. | |
| 1860 | |
| 1861 Index entries are created with the @code{\index@{@var{entry}@}} macro. | |
| 1862 All entries defined in a document are written out to the @file{.aux} | |
| 1863 file. A separate tool must be used to convert this information into a | |
| 1864 nicely formatted index. Tools used with LaTeX include @code{MakeIndex} | |
| 1865 and @code{xindy}.@refill | |
| 1866 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1867 Indexing is a very difficult task. It must follow strict conventions to |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1868 make the index consistent and complete. There are basically two |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1869 approaches one can follow, and both have their merits. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1870 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1871 @enumerate |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1872 @item |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1873 Part of the indexing should already be done with the markup. The |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1874 document structure should be reflected in the index, so when starting |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1875 new sections, the basic topics of the section should be indexed. If the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1876 document contains definitions, theorems or the like, these should all |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1877 correspond to appropriate index entries. This part of the index can |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1878 very well be developed along with the document. Often it is worthwhile |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1879 to define special purpose macros which define an item and at the same |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1880 time make an index entry, possibly with special formatting to make the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1881 reference page in the index bold or underlined. To make @b{Ref@TeX{}} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1882 support for indexing possible, these special macros must be added to |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1883 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s configuration (@pxref{Defining Index Macros}).@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1884 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1885 @item |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1886 The rest of the index is often just a collection of where in the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1887 document certain words or phrases are being used. This part is |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1888 difficult to develop along with the document, because consistent entries |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1889 for each occurrence are needed and are best selected when the document |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1890 is ready. @b{Ref@TeX{}} supports this with an @emph{index phrases file} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1891 which collects phrases and helps indexing the phrases globally.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1892 @end enumerate |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1893 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1894 Before you start, you need to make sure that @b{Ref@TeX{}} knows about |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1895 the index style being used in the current document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1896 builtin support for the default @code{\index} and @code{\glossary} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1897 macros. Other LaTeX packages, like the @file{multind} or @file{index} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1898 package, redefine the @code{\index} macro to have an additional |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1899 argument, and @b{Ref@TeX{}} needs to be configured for those. A |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1900 sufficiently new version of AUCTeX (9.10c or later) will do this |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1901 automatically. If you really don't use AUCTeX (you should!), this |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1902 configuration needs to be done by hand with the menu (@code{Ref->Index |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1903 Style}), or globally for all your documents with@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1904 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1905 @lisp |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1906 (setq reftex-index-macros '(multind)) @r{or} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1907 (setq reftex-index-macros '(index)) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1908 @end lisp |
| 25829 | 1909 |
| 1910 @menu | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1911 * Creating Index Entries:: Macros and completion of entries. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1912 * The Index Phrases File:: A special file for global indexing. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1913 * Displaying and Editing the Index:: The index editor. |
| 25829 | 1914 * Builtin Index Macros:: The index macros RefTeX knows about. |
| 1915 * Defining Index Macros:: ... and macros it doesn't. | |
| 1916 @end menu | |
| 1917 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1918 @node Creating Index Entries, The Index Phrases File, , Index Support |
| 25829 | 1919 @section Creating Index Entries |
| 1920 @cindex Creating index entries | |
| 1921 @cindex Index entries, creating | |
| 1922 @kindex C-c < | |
| 1923 @findex reftex-index | |
| 1924 @kindex C-c / | |
| 1925 @findex reftex-index-selection-or-word | |
| 1926 | |
| 1927 In order to index the current selection or the word at the cursor press | |
| 1928 @kbd{C-c /} (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). This causes the | |
| 1929 selection or word @samp{@var{word}} to be replaced with | |
| 1930 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}@var{word}}. The macro which is used | |
| 1931 (@code{\index} by default) can be configured with the variable | |
| 1932 @code{reftex-index-default-macro}. When the command is called with a | |
| 1933 prefix argument (@kbd{C-u C-c /}), you get a chance to edit the | |
| 1934 generated index entry. Use this to change the case of the word or to | |
| 1935 make the entry a subentry, for example by entering | |
| 1936 @samp{main!sub!@var{word}}. When called with two raw @kbd{C-u} prefixes | |
| 1937 (@kbd{C-u C-u C-c /}), you will be asked for the index macro as well. | |
| 1938 When there is nothing selected and no word at point, this command will | |
| 1939 just call @code{reftex-index}, described below. | |
| 1940 | |
| 1941 In order to create a general index entry, press @kbd{C-c <} | |
| 1942 (@code{reftex-index}). @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for one of the | |
| 1943 available index macros and for its arguments. Completion will be | |
| 1944 available for the index entry and, if applicable, the index tag. The | |
| 1945 index tag is a string identifying one of multiple indices. With the | |
| 1946 @file{multind} and @file{index} packages, this tag is the first argument | |
| 1947 to the redefined @code{\index} macro.@refill | |
| 1948 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1949 @node The Index Phrases File, Displaying and Editing the Index, Creating Index Entries, Index Support |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1950 @section The Index Phrases File |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1951 @cindex Index phrase file |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1952 @cindex Phrase file |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1953 @kindex C-c | |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1954 @findex reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1955 @cindex Macro definition lines, in phrase buffer |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1956 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1957 @b{Ref@TeX{}} maintains a file in which phrases can be collected for |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1958 later indexing. The file is located in the same directory as the master |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1959 file of the document and has the extension @file{.rip} (@b{R}eftex |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1960 @b{I}ndex @b{P}hrases). You can create or visit the file with @kbd{C-c |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1961 |} (@code{reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer}). If the file is empty it |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1962 is initialized by inserting a file header which contains the definition |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1963 of the available index macros. This list is initialized from |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1964 @code{reftex-index-macros} (@pxref{Defining Index Macros}). You can |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1965 edit the header as needed, but if you define new LaTeX indexing macros, |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1966 don't forget to add them to @code{reftex-index-macros} as well. Here is |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1967 a phrase file header example:@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1968 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1969 @example |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1970 % -*- mode: reftex-index-phrases -*- |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1971 % Key Macro Format Repeat |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1972 %---------------------------------------------------------- |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1973 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: i \index@{%s@} t |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1974 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: I \index*@{%s@} nil |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1975 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: g \glossary@{%s@} t |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1976 >>>INDEX_MACRO_DEFINITION: n \index*[name]@{%s@} nil |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1977 %---------------------------------------------------------- |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1978 @end example |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1979 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1980 The macro definition lines consist of a unique letter identifying a |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1981 macro, a format string and the @var{repeat} flag, all separated by |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1982 @key{TAB}. The format string shows how the macro is to be applied, the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1983 @samp{%s} will be replaced with the index entry. The repeat flag |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1984 indicates if @var{word} is indexed by the macro as |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1985 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}} (@var{repeat} = @code{nil}) or as |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1986 @samp{\index@{@var{word}@}@var{word}} (@var{repeat} = @code{t}). In the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1987 above example it is assumed that the macro @code{\index*@{@var{word}@}} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1988 already typesets its argument in the text, so that it is unnecessary to |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1989 repeat @var{word} outside the macro.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1990 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1991 @menu |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1992 * Collecting Phrases:: Collecting from document or external. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1993 * Consistency Checks:: Check for duplicates etc. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1994 * Global Indexing:: The interactive indexing process. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1995 @end menu |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1996 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1997 @node Collecting Phrases, Consistency Checks, , The Index Phrases File |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1998 @subsection Collecting Phrases |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
1999 @cindex Collecting index phrases |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2000 @cindex Index phrases, collection |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2001 @cindex Phrases, collecting |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2002 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2003 Phrases for indexing can be collected while writing the document. The |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2004 command @kbd{C-c \} (@code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word}) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2005 copies the current selection (if active) or the word near point into the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2006 phrases buffer. It then selects this buffer, so that the phrase line |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2007 can be edited. To return to the LaTeX document, press @kbd{C-c C-c} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2008 (@code{reftex-index-phrases-save-and-return}). |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2009 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2010 You can also prepare the list of index phrases in a different way and |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2011 copy it into the phrases file. For example you might want to start from |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2012 a word list of the document and remove all words which should not be |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2013 indexed. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2014 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2015 The phrase lines in the phrase buffer must have a specific format. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2016 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will use font-lock to indicate if a line has the proper |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2017 format. A phrase line looks like this: |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2018 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2019 @example |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2020 [@var{key}] <TABs> @var{phrase} [<TABs> @var{arg}[&&@var{arg}]... [ || @var{arg}]...] |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2021 @end example |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2022 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2023 @code{<TABs>} stands for white space containing at least one @key{TAB}. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2024 @var{key} must be at the start of the line and is the character |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2025 identifying one of the macros defined in the file header. It is |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2026 optional - when omitted, the first macro definition line in the file |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2027 will be used for this phrase. The @var{phrase} is the phrase to be |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2028 searched for when indexing. It may contain several words separated by |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2029 spaces. By default the search phrase is also the text entered as |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2030 argument of the index macro. If you want the index entry to be |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2031 different from the search phrase, enter another @key{TAB} and the index |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2032 argument @var{arg}. If you want to have each match produce several |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2033 index entries, separate the different index arguments with @samp{ && |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2034 }@footnote{@samp{&&} with optional spaces, see |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2035 @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-and-regexp}.}. If you want to be |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2036 able to choose at each match between several different index arguments, |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2037 separate them with @samp{ || }@footnote{@samp{||} with optional spaces, |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2038 see @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp}.}. Here is an |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2039 example:@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2040 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2041 @example |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2042 %-------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2043 I Sun |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2044 i Planet Planets |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2045 i Vega Stars!Vega |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2046 Jupiter Planets!Jupiter |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2047 i Mars Planets!Mars || Gods!Mars || Chocolate Bars!Mars |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2048 i Pluto Planets!Pluto && Kuiper Belt Objects!Pluto |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2049 @end example |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2050 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2051 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2052 So @samp{Sun} will be indexed directly as @samp{\index*@{Sun@}}, while |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2053 @samp{Planet} will be indexed as @samp{\index@{Planets@}Planet}. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2054 @samp{Vega} will be indexed as a subitem of @samp{Stars}. The |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2055 @samp{Jupiter} line will also use the @samp{i} macro as it was the first |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2056 macro definition in the file header (see above example). At each |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2057 occurrence of @samp{Mars} you will be able choose between indexing it as |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2058 a subitem of @samp{Planets}, @samp{Gods} or @samp{Chocolate Bars}. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2059 Finally, every occurrence of @samp{Pluto} will be indexed as |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2060 @samp{\index@{Planets!Pluto@}\index@{Kuiper Belt Objects!Pluto@}Pluto} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2061 and will therefore create two different index entries.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2062 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2063 @node Consistency Checks, Global Indexing, Collecting Phrases, The Index Phrases File |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2064 @subsection Consistency Checks |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2065 @cindex Index phrases, consistency checks |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2066 @cindex Phrases, consistency checks |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2067 @cindex Consistency check for index phrases |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2068 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2069 @kindex C-c C-s |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2070 Before indexing the phrases in the phrases buffer, they should be |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2071 checked carefully for consistency. A first step is to sort the phrases |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2072 alphabetically - this is done with the command @kbd{C-c C-s} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2073 (@code{reftex-index-sort-phrases}). It will sort all phrases in the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2074 buffer alphabetically by search phrase. If you want to group certain |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2075 phrases and only sort within the groups, insert empty lines between the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2076 groups. Sorting will only change the sequence of phrases within each |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2077 group (see the variable @code{reftex-index-phrases-sort-in-blocks}).@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2078 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2079 @kindex C-c C-i |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2080 A useful command is @kbd{C-c C-i} (@code{reftex-index-phrases-info}) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2081 which lists information about the phrase at point, including an example |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2082 of how the index entry will look like and the number of expected matches |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2083 in the document.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2084 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2085 @kindex C-c C-t |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2086 Another important check is to find out if there are double or |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2087 overlapping entries in the buffer. For example if you are first |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2088 searching and indexing @samp{Mars} and then @samp{Planet Mars}, the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2089 second phrase will not match because of the index macro inserted before |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2090 @samp{Mars} earlier. The command @kbd{C-c C-t} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2091 (@code{reftex-index-find-next-conflict-phrase}) finds the next phrase in |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2092 the buffer which is either duplicate or a subphrase of another phrase. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2093 In order to check the whole buffer like this, start at the beginning and |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2094 execute this command repeatedly.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2095 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2096 @node Global Indexing, , Consistency Checks, The Index Phrases File |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2097 @subsection Global Indexing |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2098 @cindex Global indexing |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2099 @cindex Indexing, global |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2100 @cindex Indexing, from @file{phrases} buffer |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2101 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2102 Once the index phrases have been collected and organized, you are set |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2103 for global indexing. I recommend to do this only on an otherwise |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2104 finished document. Global indexing starts from the phrases buffer. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2105 There are several commands which start indexing: @kbd{C-c C-x} acts on |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2106 the current phrase line, @kbd{C-c C-r} on all lines in the current |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2107 region and @kbd{C-c C-a} on all phrase lines in the buffer. It is |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2108 probably good to do indexing in small chunks since your concentration |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2109 may not last long enough to do everything in one go.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2110 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2111 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will start at the first phrase line and search the phrase |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2112 globally in the whole document. At each match it will stop, compute the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2113 replacement string and offer you the following choices@footnote{Windows |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2114 users: Restrict yourself to the described keys during indexing. Pressing |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2115 @key{Help} at the indexing prompt can apparently hang Emacs.}:@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2116 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2117 @table @kbd |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2118 @item y |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2119 Replace this match with the proposed string. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2120 @item n |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2121 Skip this match. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2122 @item ! |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2123 Replace this and all further matches in this file. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2124 @item q |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2125 Skip this match, start with next file. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2126 @item Q |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2127 Skip this match, start with next phrase. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2128 @item o |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2129 Select a different indexing macro for this match. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2130 @item 1-9 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2131 Select one of multiple index keys (those separated with @samp{||}). |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2132 @item e |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2133 Edit the replacement text. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2134 @item C-r |
| 40705 | 2135 Recursive edit. Use @kbd{C-M-c} to return to the indexing process. |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2136 @item s |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2137 Save this buffer and ask again about the current match. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2138 @item S |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2139 Save all document buffers and ask again about the current match. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2140 @item C-g |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2141 Abort the indexing process. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2142 @end table |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2143 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2144 The @samp{Find and Index in Document} menu in the phrases buffer also |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2145 lists a few options for the indexing process. The options have |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2146 associated customization variables to set the defaults (@pxref{Options |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2147 (Index Support)}). Here is a short explanation of what the options do: |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2148 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2149 @table @i |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2150 @item Match Whole Words |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2151 When searching for index phrases, make sure whole words are matched. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2152 This should probably always be on. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2153 @item Case Sensitive Search |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2154 Search case sensitively for phrases. I recommend to have this setting |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2155 off, in order to match the capitalized words at the beginning of a |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2156 sentence, and even typos. You can always say @emph{no} at a match you |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2157 do not like. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2158 @item Wrap Long Lines |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2159 Inserting index macros increases the line length. Turn this option on |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2160 to allow @b{Ref@TeX{}} to wrap long lines. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2161 @item Skip Indexed Matches |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2162 When this is on, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will at each match try to figure out if |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2163 this match is already indexed. A match is considered indexed if it is |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2164 either the argument of an index macro, or if an index macro is directly |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2165 (without whitespace separation) before or after the match. Index macros |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2166 are those configured in @code{reftex-index-macros}. Intended for |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2167 re-indexing a documents after changes have been made.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2168 @end table |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2169 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2170 Even though indexing should be the last thing you do to a document, you |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2171 are bound to make changes afterwards. Indexing then has to be applied |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2172 to the changed regions. The command |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2173 @code{reftex-index-phrases-apply-to-region} is designed for this |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2174 purpose. When called from a LaTeX document with active region, it will |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2175 apply @code{reftex-index-all-phrases} to the current region.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2176 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2177 @node Displaying and Editing the Index, Builtin Index Macros, The Index Phrases File, Index Support |
| 25829 | 2178 @section Displaying and Editing the Index |
| 2179 @cindex Displaying the Index | |
| 2180 @cindex Editing the Index | |
| 2181 @cindex Index entries, creating | |
| 2182 @cindex Index, displaying | |
| 2183 @cindex Index, editing | |
| 2184 @kindex C-c > | |
| 2185 @findex reftex-display-index | |
| 2186 | |
| 2187 In order to compile and display the index, press @kbd{C-c >}. If the | |
| 2188 document uses multiple indices, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will ask you to select | |
| 2189 one. Then, all index entries will be sorted alphabetically and | |
| 2190 displayed in a special buffer, the @file{*Index*} buffer. From that | |
| 2191 buffer you can check and edit each entry.@refill | |
| 2192 | |
| 2193 The index can be restricted to the current section or the region. Then | |
| 2194 only entries in that part of the document will go into the compiled | |
| 2195 index. To restrict to the current section, use a numeric prefix | |
| 2196 @samp{2}, thus press @kbd{C-u 2 C-c >}. To restrict to the current | |
| 2197 region, make the region active and use a numeric prefix @samp{3} (press | |
| 2198 @kbd{C-u 3 C-c >}). From within the @file{*Index*} buffer the | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2199 restriction can be moved from one section to the next by pressing the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2200 @kbd{<} and @kbd{>} keys.@refill |
| 25829 | 2201 |
| 2202 One caveat: @b{Ref@TeX{}} finds the definition point of an index entry | |
| 2203 by searching near the buffer position where it had found to macro during | |
| 2204 scanning. If you have several identical index entries in the same | |
| 2205 buffer and significant changes have shifted the entries around, you must | |
| 2206 rescan the buffer to ensure the correspondence between the | |
| 2207 @file{*Index*} buffer and the definition locations. It is therefore | |
| 2208 advisable to rescan the document (with @kbd{r} or @kbd{C-u r}) | |
| 2209 frequently while editing the index from the @file{*Index*} | |
| 2210 buffer.@refill | |
| 2211 | |
| 2212 @kindex ? | |
| 2213 Here is a list of special commands available in the @file{*Index*} buffer. A | |
| 2214 summary of this information is always available by pressing | |
| 2215 @kbd{?}.@refill | |
| 2216 | |
| 2217 @table @kbd | |
| 2218 @tablesubheading{General} | |
| 2219 @item ? | |
| 2220 Display a summary of commands. | |
| 2221 | |
| 2222 @item 0-9, - | |
| 2223 Prefix argument. | |
| 2224 | |
| 2225 @tablesubheading{Moving around} | |
| 2226 @item ! A..Z | |
| 2227 Pressing any capital letter will jump to the corresponding section in | |
| 2228 the @file{*Index*} buffer. The exclamation mark is special and jumps to | |
| 2229 the first entries alphabetically sorted below @samp{A}. These are | |
| 2230 usually non-alphanumeric characters.@refill | |
| 2231 @item n | |
| 2232 Go to next entry.@refill | |
| 2233 @item p | |
| 2234 Go to previous entry.@refill | |
| 2235 | |
| 2236 @tablesubheading{Access to document locations} | |
| 2237 @item @key{SPC} | |
| 2238 Show the place in the document where this index entry is defined.@refill | |
| 2239 | |
| 2240 @item @key{TAB} | |
| 2241 Go to the definition of the current index entry in another | |
| 2242 window.@refill | |
| 2243 | |
| 2244 @item @key{RET} | |
| 2245 Go to the definition of the current index entry and hide the | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2246 @file{*Index*} buffer window.@refill |
| 25829 | 2247 |
| 2248 @item f | |
| 2249 @vindex reftex-index-follow-mode | |
| 2250 @vindex reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
| 2251 Toggle follow mode. When follow mode is active, the other window will | |
| 2252 always show the location corresponding to the line in the @file{*Index*} | |
| 2253 buffer at point. This is similar to pressing @key{SPC} after each | |
| 2254 cursor motion. The default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
| 2255 @code{reftex-index-follow-mode}. Note that only context in files | |
| 2256 already visited is shown. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not visit a file just for | |
| 2257 follow mode. See, however, the variable | |
| 2258 @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}.@refill | |
| 2259 | |
| 2260 @tablesubheading{Entry editing} | |
| 2261 @item e | |
| 2262 Edit the current index entry. In the minibuffer, you can edit the | |
| 2263 index macro which defines this entry.@refill | |
| 2264 | |
| 2265 @item C-k | |
| 2266 Kill the index entry. Currently not implemented because I don't know | |
| 2267 how to implement an @code{undo} function for this.@refill | |
| 2268 | |
| 2269 @item * | |
| 2270 Edit the @var{key} part of the entry. This is the initial part of the | |
| 2271 entry which determines the location of the entry in the index.@refill | |
| 2272 | |
| 2273 @item | | |
| 2274 Edit the @var{attribute} part of the entry. This is the part after the | |
| 2275 vertical bar. With @code{MakeIndex}, this part is an encapsulating | |
| 2276 macro. With @code{xindy}, it is called @emph{attribute} and is a | |
| 2277 property of the index entry that can lead to special formatting. When | |
| 2278 called with @kbd{C-u} prefix, kill the entire @var{attribute} | |
| 2279 part.@refill | |
| 2280 | |
| 2281 @item @@ | |
| 2282 Edit the @var{visual} part of the entry. This is the part after the | |
| 2283 @samp{@@} which is used by @code{MakeIndex} to change the visual | |
| 2284 appearance of the entry in the index. When called with @kbd{C-u} | |
| 2285 prefix, kill the entire @var{visual} part.@refill | |
| 2286 | |
| 2287 @item ( | |
| 2288 Toggle the beginning of page range property @samp{|(} of the | |
| 2289 entry.@refill | |
| 2290 | |
| 2291 @item ) | |
| 2292 Toggle the end of page range property @samp{|)} of the entry.@refill | |
| 2293 | |
| 2294 @item _ | |
| 2295 Make the current entry a subentry. This command will prompt for the | |
| 2296 superordinate entry and insert it.@refill | |
| 2297 | |
| 2298 @item ^ | |
| 2299 Remove the highest superordinate entry. If the current entry is a | |
| 2300 subitem (@samp{aaa!bbb!ccc}), this function moves it up the hierarchy | |
| 2301 (@samp{bbb!ccc}).@refill | |
| 2302 | |
| 2303 @tablesubheading{Exiting} | |
| 2304 @item q | |
| 2305 Hide the @file{*Index*} buffer.@refill | |
| 2306 | |
| 2307 @item k | |
| 2308 Kill the @file{*Index*} buffer.@refill | |
| 2309 | |
| 2310 @item C-c = | |
| 2311 Switch to the Table of Contents buffer of this document.@refill | |
| 2312 | |
| 2313 @tablesubheading{Controlling what gets displayed} | |
| 2314 @item c | |
| 2315 @vindex reftex-index-include-context | |
| 2316 Toggle the display of short context in the @file{*Index*} buffer. The | |
| 2317 default for this flag can be set with the variable | |
| 2318 @code{reftex-index-include-context}.@refill | |
| 2319 | |
| 2320 @item @} | |
| 2321 Restrict the index to a single document section. The corresponding | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2322 section number will be displayed in the @code{R<>} indicator in the |
| 25829 | 2323 mode line and in the header of the @file{*Index*} buffer.@refill |
| 2324 | |
| 2325 @item @{ | |
| 2326 Widen the index to contain all entries of the document.@refill | |
| 2327 | |
| 2328 @item < | |
| 2329 When the index is currently restricted, move the restriction to the | |
| 2330 previous section.@refill | |
| 2331 | |
| 2332 @item > | |
| 2333 When the index is currently restricted, move the restriction to the | |
| 2334 next section.@refill | |
| 2335 | |
| 2336 @tablesubheading{Updating the buffer} | |
| 2337 @item g | |
| 2338 Rebuild the @file{*Index*} buffer. This does @emph{not} rescan the | |
| 2339 document. However, it sorts the entries again, so that edited entries | |
| 2340 will move to the correct position.@refill | |
| 2341 | |
| 2342 @item r | |
| 2343 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
| 2344 Reparse the LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*Index*} buffer. When | |
| 2345 @code{reftex-enable-partial-scans} is non-nil, rescan only the file this | |
| 2346 location is defined in, not the entire document.@refill | |
| 2347 | |
| 2348 @item C-u r | |
| 2349 Reparse the @emph{entire} LaTeX document and rebuild the @file{*Index*} | |
| 2350 buffer.@refill | |
| 2351 | |
| 2352 @item s | |
| 2353 Switch to a different index (for documents with multiple | |
| 2354 indices).@refill | |
| 2355 @end table | |
| 2356 | |
| 2357 | |
| 2358 @node Builtin Index Macros, Defining Index Macros, Displaying and Editing the Index, Index Support | |
| 2359 @section Builtin Index Macros | |
| 2360 @cindex Builtin index macros | |
| 2361 @cindex Index macros, builtin | |
| 2362 @vindex reftex-index-macros | |
| 2363 @cindex @code{multind}, LaTeX package | |
| 2364 @cindex @code{index}, LaTeX package | |
| 2365 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{multind} | |
| 2366 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{index} | |
| 2367 | |
| 2368 @b{Ref@TeX{}} by default recognizes the @code{\index} and | |
| 2369 @code{\glossary} macros which are defined in the LaTeX core. It has | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2370 also builtin support for the re-implementations of @code{\index} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2371 in the @file{multind} and @file{index} packages. However, since |
| 25829 | 2372 the different definitions of the @code{\index} macro are incompatible, |
| 2373 you will have to explicitly specify the index style used. | |
| 2374 @xref{Creating Index Entries}, for information on how to do that. | |
| 2375 | |
| 2376 @node Defining Index Macros, , Builtin Index Macros, Index Support | |
| 2377 @section Defining Index Macros | |
| 2378 @cindex Defining Index Macros | |
| 2379 @cindex Index macros, defining | |
| 2380 @vindex reftex-index-macros | |
| 2381 | |
| 2382 When writing a document with an index you will probably define | |
| 2383 additional macros which make entries into the index. | |
| 2384 Let's look at an example. | |
| 2385 | |
| 2386 @example | |
| 2387 \newcommand@{\ix@}[1]@{#1\index@{#1@}@} | |
| 2388 \newcommand@{\nindex@}[1]@{\textit@{#1@}\index[name]@{#1@}@} | |
| 2389 \newcommand@{\astobj@}[1]@{\index@{Astronomical Objects!#1@}@} | |
| 2390 @end example | |
| 2391 | |
| 2392 The first macro @code{\ix} typesets its argument in the text and places | |
| 2393 it into the index. The second macro @code{\nindex} typesets its | |
| 2394 argument in the text and places it into a separate index with the tag | |
| 2395 @samp{name}@footnote{We are using the syntax of the @file{index} package | |
| 2396 here.}. The last macro also places its argument into the index, but as | |
| 2397 subitems under the main index entry @samp{Astronomical Objects}. Here | |
| 2398 is how to make @b{Ref@TeX{}} recognize and correctly interpret these | |
| 2399 macros, first with Emacs Lisp. | |
| 2400 | |
| 2401 @lisp | |
| 2402 (setq reftex-index-macros | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2403 '(("\\ix@{*@}" "idx" ?x "" nil nil) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2404 ("\\nindex@{*@}" "name" ?n "" nil nil) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2405 ("\\astobj@{*@}" "idx" ?o "Astronomical Objects!" nil t))) |
| 25829 | 2406 @end lisp |
| 2407 | |
| 2408 Note that the index tag is @samp{idx} for the main index, and | |
| 2409 @samp{name} for the name index. @samp{idx} and @samp{glo} are reserved | |
| 2410 for the default index and for the glossary. | |
| 2411 | |
| 2412 The character arguments @code{?x}, @code{?n}, and @code{?o} are for | |
| 2413 quick identification of these macros when @b{Ref@TeX{}} inserts new | |
| 2414 index entries with @code{reftex-index}. These codes need to be | |
| 2415 unique. @code{?i}, @code{?I}, and @code{?g} are reserved for the | |
| 2416 @code{\index}, @code{\index*}, and @code{\glossary} macros, | |
| 2417 respectively. | |
| 2418 | |
| 2419 The following string is empty unless your macro adds a superordinate | |
| 2420 entry to the index key - this is the case for the @code{\astobj} macro. | |
| 2421 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2422 The next entry can be a hook function to exclude certain matches, it |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2423 almost always can be @code{nil}. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2424 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2425 The final element in the list indicates if the text being indexed needs |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2426 to be repeated outside the macro. For the normal index macros, this |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2427 should be @code{t}. Only if the macro typesets the entry in the text |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2428 (like @code{\ix} and @code{\nindex} in the example do), this should be |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2429 @code{nil}. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2430 |
| 25829 | 2431 To do the same thing with customize, you need to fill in the templates |
| 2432 like this: | |
| 2433 | |
| 2434 @example | |
| 2435 Repeat: | |
| 2436 [INS] [DEL] List: | |
| 2437 Macro with args: \ix@{*@} | |
| 2438 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: idx | |
| 2439 Access Key : x | |
| 2440 Key Prefix : | |
| 2441 Exclusion hook : nil | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2442 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] off (nil) |
| 25829 | 2443 [INS] [DEL] List: |
| 2444 Macro with args: \nindex@{*@} | |
| 2445 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: name | |
| 2446 Access Key : n | |
| 2447 Key Prefix : | |
| 2448 Exclusion hook : nil | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2449 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] off (nil) |
| 25829 | 2450 [INS] [DEL] List: |
| 2451 Macro with args: \astobj@{*@} | |
| 2452 Index Tag : [Value Menu] String: idx | |
| 2453 Access Key : o | |
| 2454 Key Prefix : Astronomical Objects! | |
| 2455 Exclusion hook : nil | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2456 Repeat Outside : [Toggle] on (non-nil) |
| 25829 | 2457 [INS] |
| 2458 @end example | |
| 2459 | |
| 2460 With the macro @code{\ix} defined, you may want to change the default | |
| 2461 macro used for indexing a text phrase (@pxref{Creating Index Entries}). | |
| 2462 This would be done like this | |
| 2463 | |
| 2464 @lisp | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2465 (setq reftex-index-default-macro '(?x "idx")) |
| 25829 | 2466 @end lisp |
| 2467 | |
| 2468 which specifies that the macro identified with the character @code{?x} (the | |
| 2469 @code{\ix} macro) should be used for indexing phrases and words already | |
| 2470 in the buffer with @kbd{C-c /} (@code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}). | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2471 The index tag is "idx".@refill |
| 25829 | 2472 |
| 2473 @node Viewing Cross-References, RefTeXs Menu, Index Support, Top | |
| 2474 @chapter Viewing Cross--References | |
| 2475 @findex reftex-view-crossref | |
| 2476 @findex reftex-mouse-view-crossref | |
| 2477 @kindex C-c & | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2478 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
| 25829 | 2479 |
| 2480 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can display cross--referencing information. This means, | |
| 2481 if two document locations are linked, @b{Ref@TeX{}} can display the | |
| 2482 matching location(s) in another window. The @code{\label} and @code{\ref} | |
| 2483 macros are one way of establishing such a link. Also, a @code{\cite} | |
| 2484 macro is linked to the corresponding @code{\bibitem} macro or a BibTeX | |
| 2485 database entry.@refill | |
| 2486 | |
| 2487 The feature is invoked by pressing @kbd{C-c &} | |
| 2488 (@code{reftex-view-crossref}) while point is on the @var{key} argument | |
| 2489 of a macro involved in cross--referencing. You can also click with | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2490 @kbd{S-mouse-2} on the macro argument. Here is what will happen for |
| 25829 | 2491 individual classes of macros:@refill |
| 2492 | |
| 2493 @table @asis | |
| 2494 | |
| 2495 @item @code{\ref} | |
| 2496 @cindex @code{\ref} | |
| 2497 Display the corresponding label definition. All usual | |
| 2498 variants@footnote{all macros that start with @samp{ref} or end with | |
| 2499 @samp{ref} or @samp{refrange}} of the @code{\ref} macro are active for | |
| 2500 cross--reference display. This works also for labels defined in an | |
| 2501 external document when the current document refers to them through the | |
| 2502 @code{xr} interface (@pxref{xr (LaTeX package)}).@refill | |
| 2503 | |
| 2504 @item @code{\label} | |
| 2505 @cindex @code{\label} | |
| 2506 @vindex reftex-label-alist | |
| 2507 Display a document location which references this label. Pressing | |
| 2508 @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds | |
| 2509 all locations. Not only the @code{\label} macro but also other macros | |
| 2510 with label arguments (as configured with @code{reftex-label-alist}) are | |
| 2511 active for cross--reference display.@refill | |
| 2512 | |
| 2513 @item @code{\cite} | |
| 2514 @cindex @code{\cite} | |
| 2515 Display the corresponding BibTeX database entry or @code{\bibitem}. | |
| 2516 All usual variants@footnote{all macros that either start or end with | |
| 2517 @samp{cite}} of the @code{\cite} macro are active for cross--reference | |
| 2518 display.@refill | |
| 2519 | |
| 2520 @item @code{\bibitem} | |
| 2521 @cindex @code{\bibitem} | |
| 2522 Display a document location which cites this article. Pressing | |
| 2523 @kbd{C-c &} several times moves through the entire document and finds | |
| 2524 all locations.@refill | |
| 2525 | |
| 2526 @item BibTeX | |
| 2527 @cindex BibTeX buffer, viewing cite locations from | |
| 2528 @cindex Viewing cite locations from BibTeX buffer | |
| 2529 @kbd{C-c &} is also active in BibTeX buffers. All locations in a | |
| 2530 document where the database entry at point is cited will be displayed. | |
| 2531 On first use, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will prompt for a buffer which belongs to | |
| 2532 the document you want to search. Subsequent calls will use the same | |
| 2533 document, until you break this link with a prefix argument to @kbd{C-c | |
| 2534 &}.@refill | |
| 2535 | |
| 2536 @item @code{\index} | |
| 2537 @cindex @code{\index} | |
| 2538 Display other locations in the document which are marked by an index | |
| 2539 macro with the same key argument. Along with the standard @code{\index} | |
| 2540 and @code{\glossary} macros, all macros configured in | |
| 2541 @code{reftex-index-macros} will be recognized.@refill | |
| 2542 @end table | |
| 2543 | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2544 @vindex reftex-view-crossref-extra |
| 25829 | 2545 While the display of cross referencing information for the above |
| 2546 mentioned macros is hard--coded, you can configure additional relations | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2547 in the variable @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra}. |
| 25829 | 2548 |
| 2549 @iftex | |
| 2550 @chapter All the Rest | |
| 2551 @end iftex | |
| 2552 | |
| 39267 | 2553 @node RefTeXs Menu, Key Bindings, Viewing Cross-References, Top |
| 25829 | 2554 @section @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s Menu |
| 2555 @cindex RefTeXs Menu | |
| 2556 @cindex Menu, in the menu bar | |
| 2557 | |
| 2558 @b{Ref@TeX{}} installs a @code{Ref} menu in the menu bar on systems | |
| 2559 which support this. From this menu you can access all of | |
| 2560 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands and a few of its options. There is also a | |
| 2561 @code{Customize} submenu which can be used to access @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s | |
| 2562 entire set of options.@refill | |
| 2563 | |
| 39267 | 2564 @node Key Bindings, Faces, RefTeXs Menu, Top |
| 2565 @section Default Key Bindings | |
| 2566 @cindex Key Bindings, summary | |
| 2567 | |
| 2568 Here is a summary of the available key bindings. | |
| 25829 | 2569 |
| 2570 @kindex C-c = | |
| 2571 @kindex C-c ( | |
| 2572 @kindex C-c ) | |
| 2573 @kindex C-c [ | |
| 2574 @kindex C-c & | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2575 @kindex S-mouse-2 |
| 25829 | 2576 @kindex C-c / |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2577 @kindex C-c \ |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2578 @kindex C-c | |
| 25829 | 2579 @kindex C-c < |
| 2580 @kindex C-c > | |
| 2581 @example | |
| 2582 @kbd{C-c =} @code{reftex-toc} | |
| 2583 @kbd{C-c (} @code{reftex-label} | |
| 2584 @kbd{C-c )} @code{reftex-reference} | |
| 2585 @kbd{C-c [} @code{reftex-citation} | |
| 2586 @kbd{C-c &} @code{reftex-view-crossref} | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2587 @kbd{S-mouse-2} @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} |
| 25829 | 2588 @kbd{C-c /} @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2589 @kbd{C-c \} @code{reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
2590 @kbd{C-c |} @code{reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer} |
| 25829 | 2591 @kbd{C-c <} @code{reftex-index} |
| 2592 @kbd{C-c >} @code{reftex-display-index} | |
| 2593 @end example | |
| 2594 | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2595 Note that the @kbd{S-mouse-2} binding is only provided if this key is |
| 25829 | 2596 not already used by some other package. @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not override an |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
2597 existing binding to @kbd{S-mouse-2}.@refill |
| 25829 | 2598 |
| 2599 Personally, I also bind some functions in the users @kbd{C-c} map for | |
| 2600 easier access.@refill | |
| 2601 | |
| 2602 @c FIXME: Do we need bindings for the Index macros here as well? | |
| 2603 @c C-c i C-c I or so???? | |
| 39267 | 2604 @c How about key bindings for reftex-reset-mode and reftex-parse-document? |
| 25829 | 2605 @kindex C-c t |
| 2606 @kindex C-c l | |
| 2607 @kindex C-c r | |
| 2608 @kindex C-c c | |
| 2609 @kindex C-c v | |
| 2610 @kindex C-c s | |
| 2611 @kindex C-c g | |
| 2612 @example | |
| 2613 @kbd{C-c t} @code{reftex-toc} | |
| 2614 @kbd{C-c l} @code{reftex-label} | |
| 2615 @kbd{C-c r} @code{reftex-reference} | |
| 2616 @kbd{C-c c} @code{reftex-citation} | |
| 2617 @kbd{C-c v} @code{reftex-view-crossref} | |
| 2618 @kbd{C-c s} @code{reftex-search-document} | |
| 2619 @kbd{C-c g} @code{reftex-grep-document} | |
| 2620 @end example | |
| 2621 | |
| 2622 @noindent These keys are reserved for the user, so I cannot bind them by | |
| 39267 | 2623 default. If you want to have these key bindings available, set in your |
| 25829 | 2624 @file{.emacs} file: |
| 2625 | |
| 2626 @vindex reftex-extra-bindings | |
| 2627 @lisp | |
| 2628 (setq reftex-extra-bindings t) | |
| 2629 @end lisp | |
| 2630 | |
| 2631 @vindex reftex-load-hook | |
| 39267 | 2632 Changing and adding to @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s key bindings is best done in the hook |
| 25829 | 2633 @code{reftex-load-hook}. For information on the keymaps |
| 2634 which should be used to add keys, see @ref{Keymaps and Hooks}. | |
| 2635 | |
| 39267 | 2636 @node Faces, AUCTeX, Key Bindings, Top |
| 25829 | 2637 @section Faces |
| 2638 @cindex Faces | |
| 2639 | |
| 2640 @b{Ref@TeX{}} uses faces when available to structure the selection and | |
| 2641 table of contents buffers. It does not create its own faces, but uses | |
| 2642 the ones defined in @file{font-lock.el}. Therefore, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
| 2643 use faces only when @code{font-lock} is loaded. This seems to be | |
| 2644 reasonable because people who like faces will very likely have it | |
| 2645 loaded. If you wish to turn off fontification or change the involved | |
| 2646 faces, see @ref{Options (Fontification)}.@refill | |
| 2647 | |
| 2648 @node Multifile Documents, Language Support, AUCTeX, Top | |
| 2649 @section Multifile Documents | |
| 2650 @cindex Multifile documents | |
| 2651 @cindex Documents, spread over files | |
| 2652 | |
| 2653 The following is relevant when working with documents spread over many | |
| 2654 files:@refill | |
| 2655 | |
| 2656 @itemize @bullet | |
| 2657 @item | |
| 2658 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has full support for multifile documents. You can edit parts of | |
| 2659 several (multifile) documents at the same time without conflicts. | |
| 2660 @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides functions to run @code{grep}, @code{search} and | |
| 2661 @code{query-replace} on all files which are part of a multifile | |
| 2662 document.@refill | |
| 2663 | |
| 2664 @item | |
| 2665 @vindex tex-main-file | |
| 2666 @vindex TeX-master | |
|
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2667 All files belonging to a multifile document should define a File |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2668 Variable (@code{TeX-master} for AUCTeX or @code{tex-main-file} for the |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2669 standard Emacs LaTeX mode) containing the name of the master file. For |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2670 example, to set the file variable @code{TeX-master}, include something |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2671 like the following at the end of each TeX file:@refill |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2672 |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2673 @example |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2674 %%% Local Variables: *** |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2675 %%% mode:latex *** |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2676 %%% TeX-master: "thesis.tex" *** |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2677 %%% End: *** |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2678 @end example |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2679 |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2680 AUCTeX with the setting |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2681 |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2682 @lisp |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2683 (setq-default TeX-master nil) |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2684 @end lisp |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2685 |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2686 will actually ask you for each new file about the master file and insert |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2687 this comment automatically. For more details see the documentation of |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2688 the AUCTeX (@pxref{Multifile,,,auctex, The AUC TeX User Manual}), the |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2689 documentation about the Emacs (La)TeX mode (@pxref{TeX Print,,,emacs, |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2690 The GNU Emacs Manual}) and the Emacs documentation on File Variables |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2691 (@pxref{File Variables,,,emacs, The GNU Emacs Manual}).@refill |
| 25829 | 2692 |
| 2693 @item | |
| 2694 The context of a label definition must be found in the same file as the | |
| 2695 label itself in order to be processed correctly by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. The only | |
| 2696 exception is that section labels referring to a section statement | |
| 2697 outside the current file can still use that section title as | |
| 2698 context.@refill | |
| 2699 @end itemize | |
| 2700 | |
| 2701 @node Language Support, Finding Files, Multifile Documents, Top | |
| 2702 @section Language Support | |
| 2703 @cindex Language support | |
| 2704 | |
| 2705 Some parts of @b{Ref@TeX{}} are language dependent. The default | |
| 2706 settings work well for English. If you are writing in a different | |
| 2707 language, the following hints may be useful: | |
| 2708 | |
| 2709 @itemize @bullet | |
| 2710 @item | |
| 2711 @vindex reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
| 2712 @vindex reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
| 2713 The mechanism to derive a label from context includes the abbreviation | |
| 2714 of words and omission of unimportant words. These mechanisms may have | |
| 2715 to be changed for other languages. See the variables | |
| 2716 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters} and @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}. | |
| 2717 | |
| 2718 @item | |
| 2719 @vindex reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
| 2720 @vindex reftex-label-illegal-re | |
| 2721 Also, when a label is derived from context, @b{Ref@TeX{}} clears the | |
| 2722 context string from non-ASCII characters in order to make a legal label. | |
| 2723 If there should ever be a version of @TeX{} which allows extended | |
| 2724 characters @emph{in labels}, then we will have to look at the | |
| 2725 variables @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function} and | |
| 2726 @code{reftex-label-illegal-re}. | |
| 2727 | |
| 2728 @item | |
| 2729 When a label is referenced, @b{Ref@TeX{}} looks at the word before point | |
| 2730 to guess which label type is required. These @emph{magic words} are | |
| 2731 different in every language. For an example of how to add magic words, | |
| 2732 see @ref{Adding Magic Words}. | |
| 2733 | |
| 2734 @vindex reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
| 2735 @vindex reftex-cite-punctuation | |
| 2736 @item | |
| 2737 @b{Ref@TeX{}} inserts ``punctuation'' for multiple references and | |
| 2738 for the author list in citations. Some of this may be language | |
| 2739 dependent. See the variables @code{reftex-multiref-punctuation} and | |
| 2740 @code{reftex-cite-punctuation}. | |
| 2741 @end itemize | |
| 2742 | |
| 2743 @node Finding Files, Optimizations, Language Support, Top | |
| 2744 @section Finding Files | |
| 2745 @cindex Finding files | |
| 2746 | |
| 2747 In order to find files included in a document via @code{\input} or | |
| 2748 @code{\include}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} searches all directories specified in the | |
| 2749 environment variable @code{TEXINPUTS}. Similarly, it will search the | |
| 2750 path specified in the variables @code{BIBINPUTS} and @code{TEXBIB} for | |
| 2751 BibTeX database files. | |
| 2752 | |
| 2753 When searching, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will also expand recursive path | |
| 2754 definitions (directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!}). But it will | |
| 2755 only search and expand directories @emph{explicitly} given in these | |
| 2756 variables. This may cause problems under the following circumstances: | |
| 2757 | |
| 2758 @itemize @bullet | |
| 2759 @item | |
| 2760 Most TeX system have a default search path for both TeX files and BibTeX | |
| 2761 files which is defined in some setup file. Usually this default path is | |
| 2762 for system files which @b{Ref@TeX{}} does not need to see. But if your | |
| 2763 document needs TeX files or BibTeX database files in a directory only | |
| 2764 given in the default search path, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will fail to find them. | |
| 2765 @item | |
| 2766 Some TeX systems do not use environment variables at all in order to | |
| 2767 specify the search path. Both default and user search path are then | |
| 2768 defined in setup files. | |
| 2769 @end itemize | |
| 2770 | |
| 2771 @noindent | |
| 2772 There are three ways to solve this problem: | |
| 2773 | |
| 2774 @itemize @bullet | |
| 2775 @item | |
| 2776 Specify all relevant directories explicitly in the environment | |
| 2777 variables. If for some reason you don't want to mess with the default | |
| 2778 variables @code{TEXINPUTS} and @code{BIBINPUTS}, define your own | |
| 2779 variables and configure @b{Ref@TeX{}} to use them instead: | |
| 2780 | |
| 2781 @lisp | |
| 2782 (setq reftex-texpath-environment-variables '("MYTEXINPUTS")) | |
| 2783 (setq reftex-bibpath-environment-variables '("MYBIBINPUTS")) | |
| 2784 @end lisp | |
| 2785 | |
| 2786 @item | |
| 2787 Specify the full search path directly in @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s variables. | |
| 2788 | |
| 2789 @lisp | |
| 2790 (setq reftex-texpath-environment-variables | |
| 2791 '("./inp:/home/cd/tex//:/usr/local/tex//")) | |
| 2792 (setq reftex-bibpath-environment-variables | |
| 2793 '("/home/cd/tex/lit/")) | |
| 2794 @end lisp | |
| 2795 | |
| 2796 @item | |
| 2797 Some TeX systems provide stand--alone programs to do the file search just | |
| 2798 like TeX and BibTeX. E.g. Thomas Esser's @code{teTeX} uses the | |
| 2799 @code{kpathsearch} library which provides the command @code{kpsewhich} | |
| 2800 to search for files. @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured to use this | |
| 2801 program. Note that the exact syntax of the @code{kpsewhich} | |
| 2802 command depends upon the version of that program. | |
| 2803 | |
| 2804 @lisp | |
| 2805 (setq reftex-use-external-file-finders t) | |
| 2806 (setq reftex-external-file-finders | |
|
37038
528310f62c34
(Finding Files): Fix an example.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36509
diff
changeset
|
2807 '(("tex" . "kpsewhich -format=.tex %f") |
|
528310f62c34
(Finding Files): Fix an example.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
36509
diff
changeset
|
2808 ("bib" . "kpsewhich -format=.bib %f"))) |
| 25829 | 2809 @end lisp |
| 2810 @end itemize | |
| 2811 | |
| 2812 @node Optimizations, Problems and Work-Arounds, Finding Files, Top | |
| 2813 @section Optimizations | |
| 2814 @cindex Optimizations | |
| 2815 | |
| 2816 Implementing the principle of least surprises, the default settings of | |
| 2817 @b{Ref@TeX{}} ensure a safe ride for beginners and casual users. However, | |
| 2818 when using @b{Ref@TeX{}} for a large project and/or on a small computer, | |
| 2819 there are ways to improve speed or memory usage.@refill | |
| 2820 | |
| 2821 @itemize @bullet | |
| 2822 @item | |
| 2823 @b{Removing Lookup Buffers}@* | |
| 2824 @cindex Removing lookup buffers | |
| 2825 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will load other parts of a multifile document as well as BibTeX | |
| 2826 database files for lookup purposes. These buffers are kept, so that | |
| 2827 subsequent use of the same files is fast. If you can't afford keeping | |
| 2828 these buffers around, and if you can live with a speed penalty, try | |
| 2829 | |
| 2830 @vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
| 2831 @lisp | |
| 2832 (setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers nil) | |
| 2833 @end lisp | |
| 2834 | |
| 2835 @item | |
| 2836 @b{Partial Document Scans}@* | |
| 2837 @cindex Partial documents scans | |
| 2838 @cindex Document scanning, partial | |
| 2839 A @kbd{C-u} prefix on the major @b{Ref@TeX{}} commands @code{reftex-label} | |
| 2840 (@kbd{C-u C-c (}), @code{reftex-reference} (@kbd{C-u C-c )}), | |
| 2841 @code{reftex-citation} (@kbd{C-u C-c [}), @code{reftex-toc} (@kbd{C-u C-c | |
| 2842 =}), and @code{reftex-view-crossref} (@kbd{C-u C-c &}) initiates | |
| 2843 re-parsing of the entire document in order to update the parsing | |
| 2844 information. For a large document this can be unnecessary, in | |
| 2845 particular if only one file has changed. @b{Ref@TeX{}} can be configured | |
| 2846 to do partial scans instead of full ones. @kbd{C-u} re-parsing then | |
| 2847 does apply only to the current buffer and files included from it. | |
| 2848 Likewise, the @kbd{r} key in both the label selection buffer and the | |
| 2849 table-of-contents buffer will only prompt scanning of the file in which | |
| 2850 the label or section macro near the cursor was defined. Re-parsing of | |
| 2851 the entire document is still available by using @kbd{C-u C-u} as a | |
| 2852 prefix, or the capital @kbd{R} key in the menus. To use this feature, | |
| 2853 try@refill | |
| 2854 | |
| 2855 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
| 2856 @lisp | |
| 2857 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t) | |
| 2858 @end lisp | |
| 2859 | |
| 2860 @item | |
| 2861 @b{Saving Parser Information}@* | |
| 2862 @cindex Saving parser information | |
| 2863 @cindex Parse information, saving to a file | |
| 27195 | 2864 @vindex reftex-parse-file-extension |
| 25829 | 2865 Even with partial scans enabled, @b{Ref@TeX{}} still has to make one full |
| 2866 scan, when you start working with a document. To avoid this, parsing | |
| 2867 information can be stored in a file. The file @file{MASTER.rel} is used | |
| 2868 for storing information about a document with master file | |
| 2869 @file{MASTER.tex}. It is written automatically when you kill a buffer | |
| 2870 in @code{reftex-mode} or when you exit Emacs. The information is | |
| 2871 restored when you begin working with a document in a new editing | |
| 2872 session. To use this feature, put into @file{.emacs}:@refill | |
| 2873 | |
| 2874 @vindex reftex-save-parse-info | |
| 2875 @lisp | |
| 2876 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t) | |
| 2877 @end lisp | |
| 2878 | |
| 2879 @item | |
| 2880 @b{Automatic Document Scans}@* | |
| 2881 @cindex Automatic document scans | |
| 2882 @cindex Document scanning, automatic | |
| 2883 At rare occasions, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will automatically rescan a part of the | |
| 2884 document. If this gets into your way, it can be turned off with | |
| 2885 | |
| 2886 @vindex reftex-allow-automatic-rescan | |
| 2887 @lisp | |
| 2888 (setq reftex-allow-automatic-rescan nil) | |
| 2889 @end lisp | |
| 2890 | |
| 2891 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will then occasionally annotate new labels in the selection | |
| 2892 buffer, saying that their position in the label list in uncertain. A | |
| 2893 manual document scan will fix this.@refill | |
| 2894 | |
| 2895 @item | |
| 2896 @b{Multiple Selection Buffers}@* | |
| 2897 @cindex Multiple selection buffers | |
| 2898 @cindex Selection buffers, multiple | |
| 2899 Normally, the selection buffer @file{*RefTeX Select*} is re-created for | |
| 2900 every selection process. In documents with very many labels this can | |
| 2901 take several seconds. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides an option to create a | |
| 2902 separate selection buffer for each label type and to keep this buffer | |
| 2903 from one selection to the next. These buffers are updated automatically | |
| 2904 only when a new label has been added in the buffers category with | |
| 2905 @code{reftex-label}. Updating the buffer takes as long as recreating it | |
| 2906 - so the time saving is limited to cases where no new labels of that | |
| 2907 category have been added. To turn on this feature, use@refill | |
| 2908 | |
| 2909 @vindex reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers | |
| 2910 @lisp | |
| 2911 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
| 2912 @end lisp | |
| 2913 | |
| 2914 @noindent | |
| 2915 @cindex Selection buffers, updating | |
| 2916 You can also inhibit the automatic updating entirely. Then the | |
| 2917 selection buffer will always pop up very fast, but may not contain the | |
| 2918 most recently defined labels. You can always update the buffer by hand, | |
| 2919 with the @kbd{g} key. To get this behavior, use instead@refill | |
| 2920 | |
| 2921 @vindex reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers | |
| 2922 @lisp | |
| 2923 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t | |
| 2924 reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers nil) | |
| 2925 @end lisp | |
| 2926 @end itemize | |
| 2927 | |
| 2928 @need 2000 | |
| 2929 @noindent | |
| 2930 @b{As a summary}, here are the settings I recommend for heavy use of | |
| 2931 @b{Ref@TeX{}} with large documents: | |
| 2932 | |
| 2933 @lisp | |
| 2934 @group | |
| 2935 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t | |
| 2936 reftex-save-parse-info t | |
| 2937 reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t) | |
| 2938 @end group | |
| 2939 @end lisp | |
| 2940 | |
| 2941 @page | |
| 2942 @node AUCTeX, Multifile Documents, Faces, Top | |
| 2943 @section @w{AUC @TeX{}} | |
| 2944 @cindex @code{AUCTeX}, Emacs package | |
| 2945 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{AUCTeX} | |
| 2946 | |
| 2947 AUCTeX is without doubt the best major mode for editing TeX and LaTeX | |
|
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2948 files with Emacs (@pxref{Top,AUCTeX,,auctex, The AUCTeX User Manual}). |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2949 If AUCTeX is not part of you Emacs distribution, you can get |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2950 it@footnote{XEmacs 21.x users may want to install the corresponding |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
2951 XEmacs package.} by ftp from the |
| 25829 | 2952 @uref{http://www.sunsite.auc.dk/auctex/,AUCTeX distribution site}. |
| 2953 | |
| 2954 @menu | |
| 2955 * AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface:: How both packages work together | |
| 2956 * Style Files:: AUCTeX's style files can support RefTeX | |
| 2957 * Bib-Cite:: Hypertext reading of a document | |
| 2958 @end menu | |
| 2959 | |
| 2960 @node AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface, Style Files, , AUCTeX | |
| 2961 @subsection The AUC@TeX{}-@b{Ref@TeX{}} Interface | |
| 2962 | |
| 2963 @b{Ref@TeX{}} contains code to interface with AUCTeX. When this | |
| 2964 interface is turned on, both packages will interact closely. Instead of | |
| 2965 using @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands directly, you can then also use them | |
| 2966 indirectly as part of the AUCTeX | |
| 2967 environment@footnote{@b{Ref@TeX{}} 4.0 and AUCTeX 9.10c will be | |
| 2968 needed for all of this to work. Parts of it work also with earlier | |
| 2969 versions.}. The interface is turned on with@refill | |
| 2970 | |
| 2971 @lisp | |
| 2972 (setq reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX t) | |
| 2973 @end lisp | |
| 2974 | |
| 2975 If you need finer control about which parts of the interface are used | |
| 2976 and which not, read the docstring of the variable | |
| 2977 @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX} or customize it with @kbd{M-x | |
| 2978 customize-variable @key{RET} reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX @key{RET}}. | |
| 2979 | |
| 2980 The following list describes the individual parts of the interface. | |
| 2981 | |
| 2982 @itemize @bullet | |
| 2983 @item | |
| 2984 @findex reftex-label | |
| 2985 @vindex LaTeX-label-function, @r{AUCTeX} | |
| 2986 @kindex C-c C-e | |
| 2987 @kindex C-c C-s | |
| 2988 @findex LaTeX-section, @r{AUCTeX} | |
| 2989 @findex TeX-insert-macro, @r{AUCTeX} | |
| 2990 @b{AUCTeX calls @code{reftex-label} to insert labels}@* | |
| 2991 When a new section is created with @kbd{C-c C-s}, or a new environment | |
| 2992 is inserted with @kbd{C-c C-e}, AUCTeX normally prompts for a label to | |
| 2993 go with it. With the interface, @code{reftex-label} is called instead. | |
| 2994 For example, if you type @kbd{C-c C-e equation @key{RET}}, AUCTeX and | |
| 2995 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will insert | |
| 2996 | |
| 2997 @example | |
| 2998 \begin@{equation@} | |
| 2999 \label@{eq:1@} | |
| 3000 | |
| 3001 \end@{equation@} | |
| 3002 @end example | |
| 3003 | |
| 3004 @noindent | |
| 3005 without further prompts. | |
| 3006 | |
| 3007 Similarly, when you type @kbd{C-c C-s section @key{RET}}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
| 3008 will offer its default label which is derived from the section title. | |
| 3009 | |
| 3010 @item | |
| 3011 @b{AUCTeX tells @b{Ref@TeX{}} about new sections}@* | |
| 3012 When creating a new section with @kbd{C-c C-s}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will not | |
| 3013 have to rescan the buffer in order to see it.@refill | |
| 3014 | |
| 3015 @item | |
| 3016 @findex reftex-arg-label | |
| 3017 @findex TeX-arg-label, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
| 3018 @findex reftex-arg-ref | |
| 3019 @findex TeX-arg-ref, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
| 3020 @findex reftex-arg-cite | |
| 3021 @findex TeX-arg-cite, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
| 3022 @findex reftex-arg-index | |
| 3023 @findex TeX-arg-index, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
| 3024 @findex TeX-insert-macro, @r{AUCTeX function} | |
| 3025 @kindex C-c @key{RET} | |
| 3026 @b{@b{Ref@TeX{}} supplies macro arguments}@* When you insert a macro | |
| 3027 interactively with @kbd{C-c @key{RET}}, AUCTeX normally prompts for | |
| 3028 macro arguments. Internally, it uses the functions | |
| 3029 @code{TeX-arg-label}, @code{TeX-arg-cite}, and @code{TeX-arg-index} to | |
| 3030 prompt for arguments which are labels, citation keys and index entries. | |
| 3031 The interface takes over these functions@footnote{@code{fset} is used to | |
| 3032 do this, which is not reversible. However, @b{Ref@TeX{}} implements the | |
| 3033 old functionality when you later decide to turn off the interface.} and | |
| 3034 supplies the macro arguments with @b{Ref@TeX{}'s} mechanisms. For | |
| 3035 example, when you type @kbd{C-c @key{RET} ref @key{RET}}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
| 3036 will supply its label selection process (@pxref{Referencing | |
| 3037 Labels}).@refill | |
| 3038 | |
| 3039 @item | |
| 3040 @b{@b{Ref@TeX{}} tells AUCTeX about new labels, citation-- and index keys}@* | |
| 3041 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will add all newly created labels to AUCTeX's completion list. | |
| 3042 @end itemize | |
| 3043 | |
| 3044 @node Style Files, Bib-Cite, AUCTeX-RefTeX Interface, AUCTeX | |
| 3045 @subsection Style Files | |
| 3046 @cindex Style files, AUCTeX | |
| 3047 @findex TeX-add-style-hook, @r{AUCTeX} | |
| 3048 Style files are Emacs Lisp files which are evaluated by AUCTeX in | |
| 3049 association with the @code{\documentclass} and @code{\usepackage} | |
|
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3050 commands of a document (@pxref{Style Files,,,auctex}). Support for |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3051 @b{Ref@TeX{}} in such a style file is useful when the LaTeX style |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3052 defines macros or environments connected with labels, citations, or the |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3053 index. Many style files (e.g. @file{amsmath.el} or @file{natbib.el}) |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3054 distributed with AUCTeX already support @b{Ref@TeX{}} in this |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
3055 way.@refill |
| 25829 | 3056 |
| 3057 Before calling a @b{Ref@TeX{}} function, the style hook should always | |
| 3058 test for the availability of the function, so that the style file will | |
| 3059 also work for people who do not use @b{Ref@TeX{}}. @refill | |
| 3060 | |
| 3061 Additions made with style files in the way described below remain local | |
| 3062 to the current document. For example, if one package uses AMSTeX, the | |
| 3063 style file will make @b{Ref@TeX{}} switch over to @code{\eqref}, but | |
| 3064 this will not affect other documents.@refill | |
| 3065 | |
| 3066 @findex reftex-add-label-environments | |
| 3067 @findex reftex-add-to-label-alist | |
| 3068 A style hook may contain calls to | |
| 3069 @code{reftex-add-label-environments}@footnote{This used to be the | |
| 3070 function @code{reftex-add-to-label-alist} which is still available as an | |
| 3071 alias for compatibility.} which defines additions to | |
| 3072 @code{reftex-label-alist}. The argument taken by this function must have | |
| 3073 the same format as @code{reftex-label-alist}. The @file{amsmath.el} | |
| 3074 style file of AUCTeX for example contains the following:@refill | |
| 3075 | |
| 3076 @lisp | |
| 3077 @group | |
| 3078 (TeX-add-style-hook "amsmath" | |
| 3079 (lambda () | |
| 3080 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-label-environments) | |
| 3081 (reftex-add-label-environments '(AMSTeX))))) | |
| 3082 @end group | |
| 3083 @end lisp | |
| 3084 | |
| 3085 @noindent | |
| 3086 @findex LaTeX-add-environments, @r{AUCTeX} | |
| 3087 while a package @code{myprop} defining a @code{proposition} environment | |
| 3088 with @code{\newtheorem} might use@refill | |
| 3089 | |
| 3090 @lisp | |
| 3091 @group | |
| 3092 (TeX-add-style-hook "myprop" | |
| 3093 (lambda () | |
| 3094 (LaTeX-add-environments '("proposition" LaTeX-env-label)) | |
| 3095 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-label-environments) | |
| 3096 (reftex-add-label-environments | |
| 3097 '(("proposition" ?p "prop:" "~\\ref@{%s@}" t | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3098 ("Proposition" "Prop.") -3)))))) |
| 25829 | 3099 @end group |
| 3100 @end lisp | |
| 3101 | |
| 3102 @findex reftex-set-cite-format | |
| 3103 Similarly, a style hook may contain a call to | |
| 3104 @code{reftex-set-cite-format} to set the citation format. The style | |
| 3105 file @file{natbib.el} for the Natbib citation style does switch | |
| 3106 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s citation format like this:@refill | |
| 3107 | |
| 3108 @lisp | |
| 3109 (TeX-add-style-hook "natbib" | |
| 3110 (lambda () | |
| 3111 (if (fboundp 'reftex-set-cite-format) | |
| 3112 (reftex-set-cite-format 'natbib)))) | |
| 3113 @end lisp | |
| 3114 | |
| 3115 @findex reftex-add-index-macros | |
| 3116 The hook may contain a call to @code{reftex-add-index-macros} to | |
| 3117 define additional @code{\index}-like macros. The argument must have | |
| 3118 the same format as @code{reftex-index-macros}. It may be a symbol, to | |
| 3119 trigger support for one of the builtin index packages. For example, | |
| 3120 the style @file{multind.el} contains | |
| 3121 | |
| 3122 @lisp | |
| 3123 (TeX-add-style-hook "multind" | |
| 3124 (lambda () | |
| 3125 (and (fboundp 'reftex-add-index-macros) | |
| 3126 (reftex-add-index-macros '(multind))))) | |
| 3127 @end lisp | |
| 3128 | |
| 3129 If you have your own package @file{myindex} which defines the | |
| 3130 following macros to be used with the LaTeX @file{index.sty} file | |
| 3131 @example | |
| 3132 \newcommand@{\molec@}[1]@{#1\index@{Molecules!#1@}@} | |
| 3133 \newcommand@{\aindex@}[1]@{#1\index[author]@{#1@} | |
| 3134 @end example | |
| 3135 | |
| 3136 you could write this in the style file @file{myindex.el}: | |
| 3137 | |
| 3138 @lisp | |
| 3139 (TeX-add-style-hook "myindex" | |
| 3140 (lambda () | |
| 3141 (TeX-add-symbols | |
| 3142 '("molec" TeX-arg-index) | |
| 3143 '("aindex" TeX-arg-index)) | |
| 3144 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-index-macros) | |
| 3145 (reftex-add-index-macros | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3146 '(("molec@{*@}" "idx" ?m "Molecules!" nil nil) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3147 ("aindex@{*@}" "author" ?a "" nil nil)))))) |
| 25829 | 3148 @end lisp |
| 3149 | |
| 3150 @findex reftex-add-section-levels | |
| 3151 Finally the hook may contain a call to @code{reftex-add-section-levels} | |
| 3152 to define additional section statements. For example, the FoilTeX class | |
| 3153 has just two headers, @code{\foilhead} and @code{\rotatefoilhead}. Here | |
| 3154 is a style file @file{foils.el} that will inform @b{Ref@TeX{}} about these: | |
| 3155 | |
| 3156 @lisp | |
| 3157 (TeX-add-style-hook "foils" | |
| 3158 (lambda () | |
| 3159 (if (fboundp 'reftex-add-section-levels) | |
| 3160 (reftex-add-section-levels '(("foilhead" . 3) | |
| 3161 ("rotatefoilhead" . 3)))))) | |
| 3162 @end lisp | |
| 3163 | |
| 3164 @node Bib-Cite, , Style Files, AUCTeX | |
| 3165 @subsection Bib-Cite | |
| 3166 @cindex @code{bib-cite}, Emacs package | |
| 3167 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{bib-cite} | |
| 3168 | |
| 3169 Once you have written a document with labels, references and citations, | |
| 3170 it can be nice to read it like a hypertext document. @b{Ref@TeX{}} has | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3171 support for that: @code{reftex-view-crossref} (bound to @kbd{C-c |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
3172 &}), @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} (bound to @kbd{S-mouse-2}), and |
| 25829 | 3173 @code{reftex-search-document}. A somewhat fancier interface with mouse |
| 3174 highlighting is provided (among other things) by Peter S. Galbraith's | |
| 3175 @file{bib-cite.el}. There is some overlap in the functionalities of | |
| 3176 Bib-cite and @b{Ref@TeX{}}. Bib-cite.el comes bundled with | |
| 3177 AUCTeX.@refill | |
| 3178 | |
| 3179 Bib-cite version 3.06 and later can be configured so that bib-cite's | |
| 3180 mouse functions use @b{Ref@TeX{}} for displaying references and citations. | |
| 3181 This can be useful in particular when working with the LaTeX @code{xr} | |
| 3182 package or with an explicit @code{thebibliography} environment (rather | |
| 3183 than BibTeX). Bib-cite cannot handle those, but @b{Ref@TeX{}} does. To | |
| 3184 make use of this feature, try@refill | |
| 3185 | |
| 3186 @vindex bib-cite-use-reftex-view-crossref | |
| 3187 @lisp | |
| 3188 (setq bib-cite-use-reftex-view-crossref t) | |
| 3189 @end lisp | |
| 3190 | |
| 3191 @page | |
| 3192 @node Problems and Work-Arounds, Imprint, Optimizations, Top | |
| 3193 @section Problems and Work-arounds | |
| 3194 @cindex Problems and work-arounds | |
| 3195 | |
| 3196 @itemize @bullet | |
| 3197 @item | |
| 3198 @b{LaTeX commands}@* | |
| 3199 @cindex LaTeX commands, not found | |
| 3200 @code{\input}, @code{\include}, @code{\bibliography} and @code{\section} | |
| 3201 (etc.) statements have to be first on a line (except for white space).@refill | |
| 3202 | |
| 3203 @item | |
| 3204 @b{Commented regions}@* | |
| 3205 @cindex Labels, commented out | |
| 3206 @b{Ref@TeX{}} sees also labels in regions commented out and will refuse to | |
| 3207 make duplicates of such labels. This is considered to be a feature.@refill | |
| 3208 | |
| 3209 @item | |
| 3210 @b{Wrong section numbers}@* | |
| 3211 @cindex Section numbers, wrong | |
| 3212 @vindex reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
| 3213 When using partial scans (@code{reftex-enable-partial-scans}), the section | |
| 3214 numbers in the table of contents may eventually become wrong. A full | |
| 3215 scan will fix this.@refill | |
| 3216 | |
| 3217 @item | |
| 3218 @b{Local settings}@* | |
| 3219 @cindex Settings, local | |
| 3220 @findex reftex-add-label-environments | |
| 3221 @findex reftex-set-cite-format | |
| 3222 @findex reftex-add-section-levels | |
| 3223 The label environment definitions in @code{reftex-label-alist} are | |
| 3224 global and apply to all documents. If you need to make definitions | |
| 3225 local to a document, because they would interfere with settings in other | |
| 3226 documents, you should use AUCTeX and set up style files with calls to | |
| 3227 @code{reftex-add-label-environments}, @code{reftex-set-cite-format}, | |
| 3228 @code{reftex-add-index-macros}, and @code{reftex-add-section-levels}. | |
| 3229 Settings made with these functions remain local to the current | |
| 3230 document. @xref{AUCTeX}.@refill | |
| 3231 | |
| 3232 @item | |
| 3233 @b{Funny display in selection buffer}@* | |
| 3234 @cindex @code{x-symbol}, Emacs package | |
| 3235 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{x-symbol} | |
| 3236 @cindex @code{isotex}, Emacs package | |
| 3237 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{isotex} | |
| 3238 @cindex @code{iso-cvt}, Emacs package | |
| 3239 @cindex Emacs packages, @code{iso-cvt} | |
| 3240 When using packages which make the buffer representation of a file | |
| 3241 different from its disk representation (e.g. x-symbol, isotex, | |
| 3242 iso-cvt) you may find that @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s parsing information sometimes | |
| 3243 reflects the disk state of a file. This happens only in @emph{unvisited} | |
| 3244 parts of a multifile document, because @b{Ref@TeX{}} visits these files | |
| 3245 literally for speed reasons. Then both short context and section | |
| 3246 headings may look different from what you usually see on your screen. | |
| 3247 In rare cases @code{reftex-toc} may have problems to jump to an affected | |
| 3248 section heading. There are three possible ways to deal with | |
| 3249 this:@refill | |
| 3250 @itemize @minus | |
| 3251 @item | |
| 3252 @vindex reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
| 3253 @code{(setq reftex-keep-temporary-buffers t)}@* | |
| 3254 This implies that @b{Ref@TeX{}} will load all parts of a multifile | |
| 3255 document into Emacs (i.e. there won't be any temporary buffers).@refill | |
| 3256 @item | |
| 3257 @vindex reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers | |
| 3258 @code{(setq reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers t)}@* | |
| 3259 This means full initialization of temporary buffers. It involves | |
| 3260 a penalty when the same unvisited file is used for lookup often.@refill | |
| 3261 @item | |
| 3262 Set @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers} to a list of hook | |
| 3263 functions doing a minimal initialization.@refill | |
| 3264 @end itemize | |
| 3265 @vindex reftex-refontify-context | |
| 3266 See also the variable @code{reftex-refontify-context}. | |
| 3267 | |
| 3268 @item | |
| 3269 @b{Labels as arguments to \begin}@* | |
| 3270 @cindex @code{pf}, LaTeX package | |
| 3271 @cindex LaTeX packages, @code{pf} | |
| 3272 Some packages use an additional argument to a @code{\begin} macro | |
| 3273 to specify a label. E.g. Lamport's @file{pf.sty} uses both | |
| 3274 @example | |
| 3275 \step@{@var{label}@}@{@var{claim}@} and \begin@{step+@}@{@var{label}@} | |
| 3276 @var{claim} | |
| 3277 \end@{step+@} | |
| 3278 @end example | |
| 3279 | |
| 3280 @noindent | |
| 3281 We need to trick @b{Ref@TeX{}} into swallowing this: | |
| 3282 | |
| 3283 @lisp | |
| 3284 @group | |
| 3285 ;; Configuration for Lamport's pf.sty | |
| 3286 (setq reftex-label-alist | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3287 '(("\\step@{*@}@{@}" ?p "st:" "~\\stepref@{%s@}" 2 ("Step" "St.")) |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3288 ("\\begin@{step+@}@{*@}" ?p "st:" "~\\stepref@{%s@}" 1000))) |
| 25829 | 3289 @end group |
| 3290 @end lisp | |
| 3291 | |
| 3292 @noindent | |
| 3293 The first line is just a normal configuration for a macro. For the | |
| 3294 @code{step+} environment we actually tell @b{Ref@TeX{}} to look for the | |
| 3295 @emph{macro} @samp{\begin@{step+@}} and interpret the @emph{first} | |
| 3296 argument (which really is a second argument to the macro @code{\begin}) | |
| 3297 as a label of type @code{?p}. Argument count for this macro starts only | |
| 3298 after the @samp{@{step+@}}, also when specifying how to get | |
| 3299 context.@refill | |
| 3300 | |
| 3301 @item | |
| 3302 @b{Idle timers in XEmacs}@* | |
| 3303 @cindex Idle timer restart | |
| 3304 @vindex reftex-use-itimer-in-xemacs | |
| 3305 In XEmacs, idle timer restart does not work reliably after fast | |
| 3306 keystrokes. Therefore @b{Ref@TeX{}} currently uses the post command | |
| 3307 hook to start the timer used for automatic crossref information. When | |
| 3308 this bug gets fixed, a real idle timer can be requested with | |
| 3309 @lisp | |
| 3310 (setq reftex-use-itimer-in-xemacs t) | |
| 3311 @end lisp | |
| 3312 | |
| 3313 @item | |
| 3314 @b{Viper mode}@* | |
| 3315 @cindex Viper mode | |
| 39267 | 3316 @cindex Key bindings, problems with Viper mode |
| 25829 | 3317 @findex viper-harness-minor-mode |
| 3318 With @i{Viper} mode prior to Vipers version 3.01, you need to protect | |
| 3319 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s keymaps with@refill | |
| 3320 | |
| 3321 @lisp | |
| 3322 (viper-harness-minor-mode "reftex") | |
| 3323 @end lisp | |
| 3324 | |
| 3325 @end itemize | |
| 3326 | |
| 3327 @page | |
| 3328 @node Imprint, Commands, Problems and Work-Arounds, Top | |
| 3329 @section Imprint | |
| 3330 @cindex Imprint | |
| 3331 @cindex Maintainer | |
| 3332 @cindex Acknowledgments | |
| 3333 @cindex Thanks | |
| 3334 @cindex Bug reports | |
| 3335 @cindex @code{http}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} home page | |
| 3336 @cindex @code{ftp}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} site | |
| 3337 | |
| 3338 @b{Ref@TeX{}} was written by @i{@value{AUTHOR}} | |
| 3339 @email{@value{AUTHOR-EMAIL}}, with contributions by @i{Stephen | |
| 3340 Eglen}. @b{Ref@TeX{}} is currently maintained by @refill | |
| 3341 | |
| 3342 @noindent | |
| 3343 @value{MAINTAINER} @email{@value{MAINTAINER-EMAIL}} | |
| 3344 | |
| 3345 If you have questions about @b{Ref@TeX{}}, there are several Usenet | |
| 3346 groups which have competent readers: @code{comp.emacs}, | |
| 3347 @code{gnu.emacs.help}, @code{comp.emacs.xemacs}, @code{comp.text.tex}. | |
| 3348 You can also write directly to the maintainer. | |
| 3349 | |
| 3350 If you find a bug in @b{Ref@TeX{}} or its documentation, or if you want | |
| 3351 to contribute code or ideas, please | |
| 3352 @uref{mailto:@value{MAINTAINER-EMAIL},contact the maintainer}. Remember | |
| 3353 to provide all necessary information such as version numbers of Emacs | |
| 3354 and @b{Ref@TeX{}}, and the relevant part of your configuration in | |
| 3355 @file{.emacs}. When reporting a bug which throws an exception, please | |
| 3356 include a backtrace if you know how to produce one. | |
| 3357 | |
| 3358 @b{Ref@TeX{}} is bundled and pre-installed with Emacs since version 20.2. | |
| 3359 It was also bundled and pre-installed with XEmacs 19.16--20.x. XEmacs | |
| 3360 21.x users want to install the corresponding plugin package which is | |
| 3361 available from the XEmacs @code{ftp} site. See the XEmacs 21.x | |
| 3362 documentation on package installation for details.@refill | |
| 3363 | |
| 3364 Users of earlier Emacs distributions (including Emacs 19) can get a | |
| 3365 @b{Ref@TeX{}} distribution from the | |
| 3366 @uref{http://www.strw.leidenuniv.nl/~dominik/Tools/,maintainers | |
| 3367 webpage}. Note that the Emacs 19 version supports many but not all | |
| 3368 features described in this manual.@refill | |
| 3369 | |
| 3370 Thanks to the people on the Net who have used @b{Ref@TeX{}} and helped | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3371 developing it with their reports. In particular thanks to @i{Fran |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3372 Burstall, Alastair Burt, Soren Dayton, Stephen Eglen, Karl Eichwalder, |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
3373 Erik Frik, Peter Galbraith, Kai Grossjohann, Frank Harrell, Dieter |
|
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
3374 Kraft, Adrian Lanz, Rory Molinari, Stefan Monnier, Laurent Mugnier, |
|
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
3375 Sudeep Kumar Palat, Daniel Polani, Robin Socha, Richard Stanton, Allan |
|
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
3376 Strand, Jan Vroonhof, Christoph Wedler, Alan Williams}.@refill |
| 25829 | 3377 |
| 3378 The @code{view-crossref} feature was inspired by @i{Peter Galbraith's} | |
| 3379 @file{bib-cite.el}.@refill | |
| 3380 | |
| 3381 Finally thanks to @i{Uwe Bolick} who first got me (some years ago) into | |
| 3382 supporting LaTeX labels and references with an editor (which was | |
| 3383 MicroEmacs at the time).@refill | |
| 3384 | |
| 3385 @node Commands, Options, Imprint, Top | |
| 3386 @chapter Commands | |
| 3387 @cindex Commands, list of | |
| 3388 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3389 Here is a summary of @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s commands which can be executed from |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3390 LaTeX files. Command which are executed from the special buffers are |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3391 not described here. All commands are available from the @code{Ref} |
| 39267 | 3392 menu. See @xref{Key Bindings}. |
| 25829 | 3393 |
| 3394 @deffn Command reftex-toc | |
| 3395 Show the table of contents for the current document. When called with | |
| 3396 one ore two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, rescan the document first.@refill | |
| 3397 @end deffn | |
| 3398 | |
| 3399 @deffn Command reftex-label | |
| 3400 Insert a unique label. With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce | |
| 3401 document rescan first. | |
| 3402 @end deffn | |
| 3403 | |
| 3404 @deffn Command reftex-reference | |
| 3405 Start a selection process to select a label, and insert a reference to | |
| 3406 it. With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce document rescan first. | |
| 3407 @end deffn | |
| 3408 | |
| 3409 @deffn Command reftex-citation | |
| 3410 Make a citation using BibTeX database files. After prompting for a regular | |
| 3411 expression, scans the buffers with BibTeX entries (taken from the | |
| 3412 @code{\bibliography} command or a @code{thebibliography} environment) | |
| 3413 and offers the matching entries for selection. The selected entry is | |
| 3414 formated according to @code{reftex-cite-format} and inserted into the | |
| 3415 buffer.@refill @* | |
| 3416 When called with one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, first rescans the | |
| 3417 document. When called with a numeric prefix, make that many citations. | |
| 3418 When called with point inside the braces of a @code{\cite} command, it | |
| 3419 will add another key, ignoring the value of | |
| 3420 @code{reftex-cite-format}.@refill @* | |
| 3421 The regular expression uses an expanded syntax: @samp{&&} is interpreted | |
| 3422 as @code{and}. Thus, @samp{aaaa&&bbb} matches entries which contain | |
| 3423 both @samp{aaaa} and @samp{bbb}. While entering the regexp, completion | |
| 3424 on knows citation keys is possible. @samp{=} is a good regular | |
| 3425 expression to match all entries in all files.@refill | |
| 3426 @end deffn | |
| 3427 | |
| 3428 @deffn Command reftex-index | |
| 3429 Query for an index macro and insert it along with its arguments. The | |
| 3430 index macros available are those defined in @code{reftex-index-macro} or | |
| 3431 by a call to @code{reftex-add-index-macros}, typically from an AUCTeX | |
| 3432 style file. @b{Ref@TeX{}} provides completion for the index tag and the | |
| 3433 index key, and will prompt for other arguments.@refill | |
| 3434 @end deffn | |
| 3435 | |
| 3436 @deffn Command reftex-index-selection-or-word | |
| 3437 Put current selection or the word near point into the default index | |
| 3438 macro. This uses the information in @code{reftex-index-default-macro} | |
| 3439 to make an index entry. The phrase indexed is the current selection or | |
| 3440 the word near point. When called with one @kbd{C-u} prefix, let the | |
| 3441 user have a chance to edit the index entry. When called with 2 | |
| 3442 @kbd{C-u} as prefix, also ask for the index macro and other stuff. When | |
| 3443 called inside TeX math mode as determined by the @file{texmathp.el} | |
| 3444 library which is part of AUCTeX, the string is first processed with the | |
| 3445 @code{reftex-index-math-format}, which see.@refill | |
| 3446 @end deffn | |
| 3447 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3448 @deffn Command reftex-index-phrase-selection-or-word |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3449 Add current selection or the word at point to the phrases buffer. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3450 When you are in transient-mark-mode and the region is active, the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3451 selection will be used - otherwise the word at point. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3452 You get a chance to edit the entry in the phrases buffer - to save the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3453 buffer and return to the LaTeX document, finish with @kbd{C-c C-c}. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3454 @end deffn |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3455 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3456 @deffn Command reftex-index-visit-phrases-buffer |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3457 Switch to the phrases buffer, initialize if empty. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3458 @end deffn |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3459 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3460 @deffn Command reftex-index-phrases-apply-to-region |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3461 Index all index phrases in the current region. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3462 This works exactly like global indexing from the index phrases buffer, |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3463 but operation is restricted to the current region. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3464 @end deffn |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3465 |
| 25829 | 3466 @deffn Command reftex-display-index |
| 3467 Display a buffer with an index compiled from the current document. | |
| 3468 When the document has multiple indices, first prompts for the correct one. | |
| 3469 When index support is turned off, offer to turn it on. | |
| 3470 With one or two @kbd{C-u} prefixes, rescan document first. | |
| 3471 With prefix 2, restrict index to current document section. | |
| 3472 With prefix 3, restrict index to active region.@refill | |
| 3473 @end deffn | |
| 3474 | |
| 3475 @deffn Command reftex-view-crossref | |
| 3476 View cross reference of macro at point. Point must be on the @var{key} | |
| 3477 argument. Works with the macros @code{\label}, @code{\ref}, | |
| 3478 @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, @code{\index} and many derivatives of | |
| 3479 these. Where it makes sense, subsequent calls show additional | |
| 3480 locations. See also the variable @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra} and | |
| 3481 the command @code{reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex}. With one or two | |
| 3482 @kbd{C-u} prefixes, enforce rescanning of the document. With argument | |
| 3483 2, select the window showing the cross reference. | |
| 3484 @end deffn | |
| 3485 | |
| 3486 @deffn Command reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex | |
| 3487 View location in a LaTeX document which cites the BibTeX entry at point. | |
| 3488 Since BibTeX files can be used by many LaTeX documents, this function | |
| 3489 prompts upon first use for a buffer in @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. To reset this | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
3490 link to a document, call the function with with a prefix arg. Calling |
| 25829 | 3491 this function several times find successive citation locations. |
| 3492 @end deffn | |
| 3493 | |
| 3494 @deffn Command reftex-create-tags-file | |
| 3495 Create TAGS file by running @code{etags} on the current document. The | |
| 3496 TAGS file is also immediately visited with | |
| 3497 @code{visit-tags-table}.@refill | |
| 3498 @end deffn | |
| 3499 | |
| 3500 @deffn Command reftex-grep-document | |
| 3501 Run grep query through all files related to this document. | |
| 3502 With prefix arg, force to rescan document. | |
| 3503 No active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
| 3504 @end deffn | |
| 3505 | |
| 3506 @deffn Command reftex-search-document | |
| 3507 Regexp search through all files of the current document. | |
| 3508 Starts always in the master file. Stops when a match is found. | |
| 3509 No active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
| 3510 @end deffn | |
| 3511 | |
| 3512 @deffn Command reftex-query-replace-document | |
| 3513 Run a query-replace-regexp of @var{from} with @var{to} over the entire | |
| 3514 document. With prefix arg, replace only word-delimited matches. No | |
| 3515 active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
| 3516 @end deffn | |
| 3517 | |
| 3518 @deffn Command reftex-change-label | |
| 3519 Query replace @var{from} with @var{to} in all @code{\label} and | |
| 3520 @code{\ref} commands. Works on the entire multifile document. No | |
| 3521 active TAGS table is required.@refill | |
| 3522 @end deffn | |
| 3523 | |
| 3524 @deffn Command reftex-renumber-simple-labels | |
| 3525 Renumber all simple labels in the document to make them sequentially. | |
| 3526 Simple labels are the ones created by RefTeX, consisting only of the | |
| 3527 prefix and a number. After the command completes, all these labels will | |
| 3528 have sequential numbers throughout the document. Any references to the | |
| 3529 labels will be changed as well. For this, @b{Ref@TeX{}} looks at the | |
| 3530 arguments of any macros which either start or end with the string | |
| 3531 @samp{ref}. This command should be used with care, in particular in | |
| 3532 multifile documents. You should not use it if another document refers | |
| 3533 to this one with the @code{xr} package.@refill | |
| 3534 @end deffn | |
| 3535 | |
| 3536 @deffn Command reftex-find-duplicate-labels | |
| 3537 Produce a list of all duplicate labels in the document.@refill | |
| 3538 @end deffn | |
| 3539 | |
| 3540 @deffn Command reftex-customize | |
| 3541 Run the customize browser on the @b{Ref@TeX{}} group. | |
| 3542 @end deffn | |
| 3543 @deffn Command reftex-show-commentary | |
| 3544 Show the commentary section from @file{reftex.el}. | |
| 3545 @end deffn | |
| 3546 @deffn Command reftex-info | |
| 3547 Run info on the top @b{Ref@TeX{}} node. | |
| 3548 @end deffn | |
| 3549 @deffn Command reftex-parse-document | |
| 3550 Parse the entire document in order to update the parsing information. | |
| 3551 @end deffn | |
| 3552 @deffn Command reftex-reset-mode | |
| 3553 Enforce rebuilding of several internal lists and variables. Also | |
| 3554 removes the parse file associated with the current document. | |
| 3555 @end deffn | |
| 3556 | |
| 3557 @node Options, Keymaps and Hooks, Commands, Top | |
| 3558 @chapter Options, Keymaps, Hooks | |
| 3559 @cindex Options, list of | |
| 3560 | |
| 3561 Here is a complete list of @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s configuration variables. All | |
| 3562 variables have customize support - so if you are not familiar with Emacs | |
| 3563 Lisp (and even if you are) you might find it more comfortable to use | |
| 3564 @code{customize} to look at and change these variables. @kbd{M-x | |
| 3565 reftex-customize} will get you there.@refill | |
| 3566 | |
| 3567 @menu | |
| 3568 * Options (Table of Contents):: | |
| 3569 * Options (Defining Label Environments):: | |
| 3570 * Options (Creating Labels):: | |
| 3571 * Options (Referencing Labels):: | |
| 3572 * Options (Creating Citations):: | |
| 3573 * Options (Index Support):: | |
| 3574 * Options (Viewing Cross-References):: | |
| 3575 * Options (Finding Files):: | |
| 3576 * Options (Optimizations):: | |
| 3577 * Options (Fontification):: | |
| 3578 * Options (Misc):: | |
| 3579 @end menu | |
| 3580 | |
| 3581 @node Options (Table of Contents), Options (Defining Label Environments), , Options | |
| 3582 @section Table of Contents | |
| 3583 @cindex Options, table of contents | |
| 3584 @cindex Table of contents, options | |
| 3585 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3586 @defopt reftex-toc-max-level |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3587 The maximum level of toc entries which will be included in the TOC. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3588 Section headings with a bigger level will be ignored. In RefTeX, |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3589 chapters are level 1, sections level 2 etc. This variable can be |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3590 changed from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{t} key.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3591 @end defopt |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3592 |
| 25829 | 3593 @defopt reftex-toc-keep-other-windows |
| 3594 Non-@code{nil} means, split the selected window to display the | |
| 3595 @file{*toc*} buffer. This helps to keep the window configuration, but | |
| 3596 makes the @file{*toc*} small. When @code{nil}, all other windows except | |
| 3597 the selected one will be deleted, so that the @file{*toc*} window fills | |
| 3598 half the frame.@refill | |
| 3599 @end defopt | |
| 3600 | |
| 3601 @defopt reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries | |
| 3602 Non-@code{nil} means, include file boundaries in @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
| 3603 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
| 3604 @kbd{i} key.@refill | |
| 3605 @end defopt | |
| 3606 | |
| 3607 @defopt reftex-toc-include-labels | |
| 3608 Non-@code{nil} means, include labels in @file{*toc*} buffer. This flag | |
| 3609 can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{l} | |
| 3610 key.@refill | |
| 3611 @end defopt | |
| 3612 | |
| 3613 @defopt reftex-toc-include-index-entries | |
| 3614 Non-@code{nil} means, include index entries in @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
| 3615 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
| 3616 @kbd{i} key. | |
| 3617 @end defopt | |
| 3618 | |
| 3619 @defopt reftex-toc-include-context | |
| 3620 Non-@code{nil} means, include context with labels in the @file{*toc*} | |
| 3621 buffer. Context will only be shown if the labels are visible as well. | |
| 3622 This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the | |
| 3623 @kbd{c} key.@refill | |
| 3624 @end defopt | |
| 3625 | |
| 3626 @defopt reftex-toc-follow-mode | |
| 3627 Non-@code{nil} means, point in @file{*toc*} buffer (the | |
| 3628 table-of-contents buffer) will cause other window to follow. The other | |
| 3629 window will show the corresponding part of the document. This flag can | |
| 3630 be toggled from within the @file{*toc*} buffer with the @kbd{f} | |
| 3631 key.@refill | |
| 3632 @end defopt | |
| 3633 | |
| 3634 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-toc-mode-hook | |
| 3635 Normal hook which is run when a @file{*toc*} buffer is | |
| 3636 created.@refill | |
| 3637 @end deffn | |
| 3638 | |
| 3639 @deffn Keymap reftex-toc-map | |
| 3640 The keymap which is active in the @file{*toc*} buffer. | |
| 3641 (@pxref{Table of Contents}).@refill | |
| 3642 @end deffn | |
| 3643 | |
| 3644 @node Options (Defining Label Environments), Options (Creating Labels), Options (Table of Contents), Options | |
| 3645 @section Defining Label Environments | |
| 3646 @cindex Options, defining label environments | |
| 3647 @cindex Defining label environments, options | |
| 3648 | |
| 3649 @defopt reftex-default-label-alist-entries | |
| 3650 Default label alist specifications. It is a list of symbols with | |
| 3651 associations in the constant @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin}. | |
| 3652 @code{LaTeX} should always be the last entry.@refill | |
| 3653 @end defopt | |
| 3654 | |
| 3655 @defopt reftex-label-alist | |
| 3656 Set this variable to define additions and changes to the defaults in | |
| 3657 @code{reftex-default-label-alist-entries}. The only things you | |
| 3658 @emph{must not} change is that @code{?s} is the type indicator for | |
| 3659 section labels, and @key{SPC} for the @code{any} label type. These are | |
| 3660 hard-coded at other places in the code.@refill | |
| 3661 | |
| 3662 The value of the variable must be a list of items. Each item is a list | |
| 3663 itself and has the following structure: | |
| 3664 | |
| 3665 @example | |
| 3666 (@var{env-or-macro} @var{type-key} @var{label-prefix} @var{reference-format} | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3667 @var{context-method} (@var{magic-word} ... ) @var{toc-level}) |
| 25829 | 3668 @end example |
| 3669 | |
| 3670 Each list entry describes either an environment carrying a counter for | |
| 3671 use with @code{\label} and @code{\ref}, or a LaTeX macro defining a | |
| 3672 label as (or inside) one of its arguments. The elements of each list | |
| 3673 entry are:@refill | |
| 3674 | |
| 3675 @table @asis | |
| 3676 @item @var{env-or-macro} | |
| 3677 Name of the environment (like @samp{table}) or macro (like | |
| 3678 @samp{\myfig}). For macros, indicate the arguments, as in | |
| 3679 @samp{\myfig[]@{@}@{@}@{*@}@{@}}. Use square brackets for optional | |
| 3680 arguments, a star to mark the label argument, if any. The macro does | |
| 3681 not have to have a label argument - you could also use | |
| 3682 @samp{\label@{...@}} inside one of its arguments.@refill | |
| 3683 | |
| 3684 Special names: @code{section} for section labels, @code{any} to define a | |
| 3685 group which contains all labels.@refill | |
| 3686 | |
| 3687 This may also be a function to do local parsing and identify point to be | |
| 3688 in a a non-standard label environment. The function must take an | |
| 3689 argument @var{bound} and limit backward searches to this value. It | |
| 3690 should return either nil or a cons cell @code{(@var{function} | |
| 3691 . @var{position})} with the function symbol and the position where the | |
| 3692 special environment starts. See the Info documentation for an | |
| 3693 example.@refill | |
| 3694 | |
| 3695 Finally this may also be @code{nil} if the entry is only meant to change | |
| 3696 some settings associated with the type indicator character (see | |
| 3697 below).@refill | |
| 3698 | |
| 3699 @item @var{type-key} | |
| 3700 Type indicator character, like @code{?t}, must be a printable ASCII | |
| 3701 character. The type indicator is a single character which defines a | |
| 3702 label type. Any label inside the environment or macro is assumed to | |
| 3703 belong to this type. The same character may occur several times in this | |
| 3704 list, to cover cases in which different environments carry the same | |
| 3705 label type (like @code{equation} and @code{eqnarray}). If the type | |
| 3706 indicator is @code{nil} and the macro has a label argument @samp{@{*@}}, | |
| 3707 the macro defines neutral labels just like @code{\label}. In this case | |
| 3708 the reminder of this entry is ignored.@refill | |
| 3709 | |
| 3710 @item @var{label-prefix} | |
| 3711 Label prefix string, like @samp{tab:}. The prefix is a short string | |
| 3712 used as the start of a label. It may be the empty string. The prefix | |
| 3713 may contain the following @samp{%} escapes:@refill | |
| 3714 | |
| 3715 @example | |
| 3716 %f Current file name, directory and extension stripped. | |
| 3717 %F Current file name relative to master file directory. | |
| 3718 %u User login name, on systems which support this. | |
| 3719 %S A section prefix derived with variable @code{reftex-section-prefixes}. | |
| 3720 @end example | |
| 3721 | |
| 3722 @noindent | |
| 3723 Example: In a file @file{intro.tex}, @samp{eq:%f:} will become | |
| 3724 @samp{eq:intro:}.@refill | |
| 3725 | |
| 3726 @item @var{reference-format} | |
| 3727 Format string for reference insert in buffer. @samp{%s} will be | |
| 3728 replaced by the label. When the format starts with @samp{~}, this | |
| 3729 @samp{~} will only be inserted when the character before point is | |
| 3730 @emph{not} a whitespace.@refill | |
| 3731 | |
| 3732 @item @var{context-method} | |
| 3733 Indication on how to find the short context. | |
| 3734 @itemize @minus | |
| 3735 @item | |
| 3736 If @code{nil}, use the text following the @samp{\label@{...@}} macro.@refill | |
| 3737 @item | |
| 3738 If @code{t}, use | |
| 3739 @itemize @minus | |
| 3740 @item | |
| 3741 the section heading for section labels. | |
| 3742 @item | |
| 3743 text following the @samp{\begin@{...@}} statement of environments (not | |
| 3744 a good choice for environments like eqnarray or enumerate, where one has | |
| 3745 several labels in a single environment).@refill | |
| 3746 @item | |
| 3747 text after the macro name (starting with the first arg) for | |
| 3748 macros.@refill | |
| 3749 @end itemize | |
| 3750 @item | |
| 3751 If an integer, use the nth argument of the macro. As a special case, | |
| 3752 1000 means to get text after the last macro argument.@refill | |
| 3753 @item | |
| 3754 If a string, use as regexp to search @emph{backward} from the label. | |
| 3755 Context is then the text following the end of the match. E.g. putting | |
| 3756 this to @samp{\\caption[[@{]} will use the caption in a figure or table | |
| 3757 environment. @samp{\\begin@{eqnarray@}\|\\\\} works for | |
| 3758 eqnarrays.@refill | |
| 3759 @item | |
| 3760 If any of @code{caption}, @code{item}, @code{eqnarray-like}, | |
| 3761 @code{alignat-like}, this symbol will internally be translated into an | |
| 3762 appropriate regexp (see also the variable | |
| 3763 @code{reftex-default-context-regexps}).@refill | |
| 3764 @item | |
| 3765 If a function, call this function with the name of the environment/macro | |
| 3766 as argument. On call, point will be just after the @code{\label} macro. | |
| 3767 The function is expected to return a suitable context string. It should | |
| 3768 throw an exception (error) when failing to find context. As an example, | |
| 3769 here is a function returning the 10 chars following the label macro as | |
| 3770 context:@refill | |
| 3771 | |
| 3772 @example | |
| 3773 (defun my-context-function (env-or-mac) | |
| 3774 (if (> (point-max) (+ 10 (point))) | |
| 3775 (buffer-substring (point) (+ 10 (point))) | |
| 3776 (error "Buffer too small"))) | |
| 3777 @end example | |
| 3778 @end itemize | |
| 3779 | |
| 3780 Label context is used in two ways by @b{Ref@TeX{}}: For display in the label | |
| 3781 menu, and to derive a label string. If you want to use a different | |
| 3782 method for each of these, specify them as a dotted pair. | |
| 3783 E.g. @code{(nil . t)} uses the text after the label (@code{nil}) for | |
| 3784 display, and text from the default position (@code{t}) to derive a label | |
| 3785 string. This is actually used for section labels.@refill | |
| 3786 | |
| 3787 @item @var{magic-word-list} | |
| 3788 List of magic words which identify a reference to be of this type. If | |
| 3789 the word before point is equal to one of these words when calling | |
| 3790 @code{reftex-reference}, the label list offered will be automatically | |
| 3791 restricted to labels of the correct type. If the first element of this | |
| 3792 word--list is the symbol `regexp', the strings are interpreted as regular | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3793 expressions.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3794 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3795 @item @var{toc-level} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3796 The integer level at which this environment should be added to the table |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3797 of contents. See also @code{reftex-section-levels}. A positive value |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3798 will number the entries mixed with the sectioning commands of the same |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3799 level. A negative value will make unnumbered entries. Useful only for |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3800 theorem-like environments which structure the document. Will be ignored |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3801 for macros. When omitted or @code{nil}, no TOC entries will be |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3802 made.@refill |
| 25829 | 3803 @end table |
| 3804 | |
| 3805 If the type indicator characters of two or more entries are the same, | |
| 3806 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will use@refill | |
| 3807 @itemize @minus | |
| 3808 @item | |
| 3809 the first non-@code{nil} format and prefix | |
| 3810 @item | |
| 3811 the magic words of all involved entries. | |
| 3812 @end itemize | |
| 3813 | |
| 3814 Any list entry may also be a symbol. If that has an association in | |
| 3815 @code{reftex-label-alist-builtin}, the @code{cddr} of that association is | |
| 3816 spliced into the list. However, builtin defaults should normally be set | |
| 3817 with the variable @code{reftex-default-label-alist-entries}.@refill | |
| 3818 @end defopt | |
| 3819 | |
| 3820 @defopt reftex-max-section-depth | |
| 3821 Maximum depth of section levels in document structure. | |
| 3822 Standard LaTeX needs 7, default is 12. | |
| 3823 @end defopt | |
| 3824 | |
| 3825 @defopt reftex-section-levels | |
| 3826 Commands and levels used for defining sections in the document. The | |
| 3827 @code{car} of each cons cell is the name of the section macro. The | |
| 3828 @code{cdr} is a number indicating its level. A negative level means the | |
| 3829 same as the positive value, but the section will never get a | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
3830 number. The @code{cdr} may also be a function which then has to return |
| 25829 | 3831 the level.@refill |
| 3832 @end defopt | |
| 3833 | |
| 3834 @defopt reftex-section-prefixes | |
| 3835 Prefixes for section labels. When the label prefix given in an entry in | |
| 3836 @code{reftex-label-alist} contains @samp{%S}, this list is used to | |
| 3837 determine the correct prefix string depending on the current section | |
| 3838 level. The list is an alist, with each entry of the form | |
| 3839 @w{@code{(@var{key} . @var{prefix})}}. Possible keys are sectioning macro | |
| 3840 names like @samp{chapter}, integer section levels (as given in | |
| 3841 @code{reftex-section-levels}), and @code{t} for the default. | |
| 3842 @end defopt | |
| 3843 | |
| 3844 @defopt reftex-default-context-regexps | |
| 3845 Alist with default regular expressions for finding context. The emacs | |
| 3846 lisp form @w{@code{(format regexp (regexp-quote environment))}} is used | |
| 3847 to calculate the final regular expression - so @samp{%s} will be | |
| 3848 replaced with the environment or macro.@refill | |
| 3849 @end defopt | |
| 3850 | |
| 3851 @node Options (Creating Labels), Options (Referencing Labels), Options (Defining Label Environments), Options | |
| 3852 @section Creating Labels | |
| 3853 @cindex Options, creating labels | |
| 3854 @cindex Creating labels, options | |
| 3855 | |
| 3856 @defopt reftex-insert-label-flags | |
| 3857 Flags governing label insertion. The value has the form | |
| 3858 | |
| 3859 @example | |
| 3860 (@var{derive} @var{prompt}) | |
| 3861 @end example | |
| 3862 | |
| 3863 If @var{derive}is @code{t}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will try to derive a sensible | |
| 3864 label from context. A section label for example will be derived from | |
| 3865 the section heading. The conversion of the context to a legal label is | |
| 3866 governed by the specifications given in | |
| 3867 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}. If @var{derive} is @code{nil}, | |
| 3868 the default label will consist of the prefix and a unique number, like | |
| 3869 @samp{eq:23}.@refill | |
| 3870 | |
| 3871 If @var{prompt} is @code{t}, the user will be prompted for a label | |
| 3872 string. When @var{prompt} is @code{nil}, the default label will be | |
| 3873 inserted without query.@refill | |
| 3874 | |
| 3875 So the combination of @var{derive} and @var{prompt} controls label | |
| 3876 insertion. Here is a table describing all four possibilities:@refill | |
| 3877 | |
| 3878 @example | |
| 3879 @group | |
| 3880 @var{derive} @var{prompt} @var{action} | |
| 3881 ----------------------------------------------------------- | |
| 3882 nil nil @r{Insert simple label, like @samp{eq:22} or @samp{sec:13}. No query.} | |
| 3883 nil t @r{Prompt for label.} | |
| 3884 t nil @r{Derive a label from context and insert. No query.} | |
| 3885 t t @r{Derive a label from context, prompt for confirmation.} | |
| 3886 @end group | |
| 3887 @end example | |
| 3888 | |
| 3889 Each flag may be set to @code{t}, @code{nil}, or a string of label type | |
| 3890 letters indicating the label types for which it should be true. Thus, | |
| 3891 the combination may be set differently for each label type. The default | |
| 3892 settings @samp{"s"} and @samp{"sft"} mean: Derive section labels from | |
| 3893 headings (with confirmation). Prompt for figure and table labels. Use | |
| 3894 simple labels without confirmation for everything else.@refill | |
| 3895 | |
| 3896 The available label types are: @code{s} (section), @code{f} (figure), | |
| 3897 @code{t} (table), @code{i} (item), @code{e} (equation), @code{n} | |
| 3898 (footnote), @code{N} (endnote) plus any definitions in | |
| 3899 @code{reftex-label-alist}.@refill | |
| 3900 @end defopt | |
| 3901 | |
| 3902 @deffn Hook reftex-format-label-function | |
| 3903 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
| 3904 insert as a label definition. The function will be called with two | |
| 3905 arguments, the @var{label} and the @var{default-format} (usually | |
| 3906 @samp{\label@{%s@}}). It should return the string to insert into the | |
| 3907 buffer.@refill | |
| 3908 @end deffn | |
| 3909 | |
| 3910 @deffn Hook reftex-string-to-label-function | |
| 3911 Function to turn an arbitrary string into a legal label. | |
| 3912 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s default function uses the variable | |
| 3913 @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters}.@refill | |
| 3914 @end deffn | |
| 3915 | |
| 3916 @deffn Hook reftex-translate-to-ascii-function | |
| 3917 Filter function which will process a context string before it is used to | |
| 3918 derive a label from it. The intended application is to convert ISO or | |
| 3919 Mule characters into something legal in labels. The default function | |
| 3920 @code{reftex-latin1-to-ascii} removes the accents from Latin-1 | |
| 3921 characters. X-Symbol (>=2.6) sets this variable to the much more | |
| 3922 general @code{x-symbol-translate-to-ascii}.@refill | |
| 3923 @end deffn | |
| 3924 | |
| 3925 @defopt reftex-derive-label-parameters | |
| 3926 Parameters for converting a string into a label. This variable is a | |
| 3927 list of the following items:@refill | |
| 3928 @table @asis | |
| 3929 @item @var{nwords} | |
| 3930 Number of words to use. | |
| 3931 @item @var{maxchar} | |
| 3932 Maximum number of characters in a label string. | |
| 3933 @item @var{illegal} | |
| 3934 @code{nil}: Throw away any words containing characters illegal in labels.@* | |
| 3935 @code{t}: Throw away only the illegal characters, not the whole word. | |
| 3936 @item @var{abbrev} | |
| 3937 @code{nil}: Never abbreviate words.@* | |
| 3938 @code{t}: Always abbreviate words (see @code{reftex-abbrev-parameters}).@* | |
| 3939 @code{1}: Abbreviate words if necessary to shorten label string. | |
| 3940 @item @var{separator} | |
| 3941 String separating different words in the label. | |
| 3942 @item @var{ignorewords} | |
| 3943 List of words which should not be part of labels. | |
| 3944 @item @var{downcase} | |
| 3945 @code{t}: Downcase words before putting them into the label.@* | |
| 3946 @end table | |
| 3947 @end defopt | |
| 3948 | |
| 3949 @defopt reftex-label-illegal-re | |
| 3950 Regexp matching characters not legal in labels. | |
| 3951 @end defopt | |
| 3952 | |
| 3953 @defopt reftex-abbrev-parameters | |
| 3954 Parameters for abbreviation of words. A list of four parameters.@refill | |
| 3955 @table @asis | |
| 3956 @item @var{min-chars} | |
| 3957 Minimum number of characters remaining after abbreviation. | |
| 3958 @item @var{min-kill} | |
| 3959 Minimum number of characters to remove when abbreviating words.@refill | |
| 3960 @item @var{before} | |
| 3961 Character class before abbrev point in word.@refill | |
| 3962 @item @var{after} | |
| 3963 Character class after abbrev point in word.@refill | |
| 3964 @end table | |
| 3965 @end defopt | |
| 3966 | |
| 3967 @node Options (Referencing Labels), Options (Creating Citations), Options (Creating Labels), Options | |
| 3968 @section Referencing Labels | |
| 3969 @cindex Options, referencing labels | |
| 3970 @cindex Referencing labels, options | |
| 3971 | |
| 3972 @defopt reftex-label-menu-flags | |
| 3973 List of flags governing the label menu makeup. The flags are: | |
| 3974 @table @asis | |
| 3975 @item @var{table-of-contents} | |
| 3976 Show the labels embedded in a table of context.@refill | |
| 3977 @item @var{section-numbers} | |
| 3978 Include section numbers (like 4.1.3) in table of contents.@refill | |
| 3979 @item @var{counters} | |
| 3980 Show counters. This just numbers the labels in the menu.@refill | |
| 3981 @item @var{no-context} | |
| 3982 Non-@code{nil} means do @emph{not} show the short context.@refill | |
| 3983 @item @var{follow} | |
| 3984 Follow full context in other window.@refill | |
| 3985 @item @var{show-commented} | |
| 3986 Show labels from regions which are commented out.@refill | |
| 3987 @item @var{match-everywhere} | |
| 3988 Obsolete flag.@refill | |
| 3989 @item @var{show-files} | |
| 3990 Show begin and end of included files.@refill | |
| 3991 @end table | |
| 3992 | |
| 3993 Each of these flags can be set to @code{t} or @code{nil}, or to a string | |
| 3994 of type letters indicating the label types for which it should be true. | |
| 3995 These strings work like character classes in regular expressions. Thus, | |
| 3996 setting one of the flags to @samp{"sf"} makes the flag true for section | |
| 3997 and figure labels, @code{nil} for everything else. Setting it to | |
| 3998 @samp{"^sf"} makes it the other way round.@refill | |
| 3999 | |
| 4000 The available label types are: @code{s} (section), @code{f} (figure), | |
| 4001 @code{t} (table), @code{i} (item), @code{e} (equation), @code{n} | |
| 4002 (footnote), plus any definitions in @code{reftex-label-alist}.@refill | |
| 4003 | |
| 4004 Most options can also be switched from the label menu itself - so if you | |
| 4005 decide here to not have a table of contents in the label menu, you can | |
| 4006 still get one interactively during selection from the label menu.@refill | |
| 4007 @end defopt | |
| 4008 | |
| 4009 @defopt reftex-multiref-punctuation | |
| 4010 Punctuation strings for multiple references. When marking is used in | |
| 4011 the selection buffer to select several references, this variable | |
| 4012 associates the 3 marking characters @samp{,-+} with prefix strings to be | |
| 4013 inserted into the buffer before the corresponding @code{\ref} macro. | |
| 4014 This is used to string together whole reference sets, like | |
| 4015 @samp{eqs. 1,2,3-5,6 and 7} in a single call to | |
| 4016 @code{reftex-reference}.@refill | |
| 4017 @end defopt | |
| 4018 | |
| 4019 @defopt reftex-vref-is-default | |
| 4020 Non-@code{nil} means, the varioref macro @code{\vref} is used as | |
| 4021 default. In the selection buffer, the @kbd{v} key toggles the reference | |
| 4022 macro between @code{\ref} and @code{\vref}. The value of this variable | |
| 4023 determines the default which is active when entering the selection | |
| 4024 process. Instead of @code{nil} or @code{t}, this may also be a string | |
| 4025 of type letters indicating the label types for which it should be | |
| 4026 true.@refill | |
| 4027 @end defopt | |
| 4028 | |
| 4029 @defopt reftex-fref-is-default | |
| 4030 Non-@code{nil} means, the fancyref macro @code{\fref} is used as | |
| 4031 default. In the selection buffer, the @kbd{V} key toggles the reference | |
| 4032 macro between @code{\ref}, @code{\fref} and @code{\Fref}. The value of | |
| 4033 this variable determines the default which is active when entering the | |
| 4034 selection process. Instead of @code{nil} or @code{t}, this may also be | |
| 4035 a string of type letters indicating the label types for which it should | |
| 4036 be true. | |
| 4037 @end defopt | |
| 4038 | |
| 4039 @deffn Hook reftex-format-ref-function | |
| 4040 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
| 4041 insert as a reference. Note that the insertion format can also be | |
| 4042 changed with @code{reftex-label-alist}. This hook also is used by the | |
| 4043 special commands to insert @code{\vref} and @code{\fref} references, so | |
| 4044 even if you set this, your setting will be ignored by the special | |
| 4045 commands. The function will be called with two arguments, the | |
| 4046 @var{label} and the @var{default-format} (usually @samp{~\ref@{%s@}}). | |
| 4047 It should return the string to insert into the buffer.@refill | |
| 4048 @end deffn | |
| 4049 | |
| 4050 @defopt reftex-level-indent | |
| 4051 Number of spaces to be used for indentation per section level.@refill | |
| 4052 @end defopt | |
| 4053 | |
| 4054 @defopt reftex-guess-label-type | |
| 4055 Non-@code{nil} means, @code{reftex-reference} will try to guess the | |
| 4056 label type. To do that, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will look at the word before the | |
| 4057 cursor and compare it with the magic words given in | |
| 4058 @code{reftex-label-alist}. When it finds a match, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will | |
| 4059 immediately offer the correct label menu - otherwise it will prompt you | |
| 4060 for a label type. If you set this variable to @code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
| 4061 will always prompt for a label type.@refill | |
| 4062 @end defopt | |
| 4063 | |
| 4064 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-display-copied-context-hook | |
| 4065 Normal Hook which is run before context is displayed anywhere. Designed | |
| 4066 for @w{@code{X-Symbol}}, but may have other uses as well.@refill | |
| 4067 @end deffn | |
| 4068 | |
| 4069 @deffn Hook reftex-pre-refontification-functions | |
| 4070 @code{X-Symbol} specific hook. Probably not useful for other purposes. | |
| 4071 The functions get two arguments, the buffer from where the command | |
| 4072 started and a symbol indicating in what context the hook is | |
| 4073 called.@refill | |
| 4074 @end deffn | |
| 4075 | |
| 4076 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-select-label-mode-hook | |
| 4077 Normal hook which is run when a selection buffer enters | |
| 4078 @code{reftex-select-label-mode}.@refill | |
| 4079 @end deffn | |
| 4080 | |
| 4081 @deffn Keymap reftex-select-label-map | |
| 4082 The keymap which is active in the labels selection process | |
| 4083 (@pxref{Referencing Labels}).@refill | |
| 4084 @end deffn | |
| 4085 | |
| 4086 @node Options (Creating Citations), Options (Index Support), Options (Referencing Labels), Options | |
| 4087 @section Creating Citations | |
| 4088 @cindex Options, creating citations | |
| 4089 @cindex Creating citations, options | |
| 4090 | |
| 4091 @defopt reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps | |
| 4092 List of regular expressions to exclude files in | |
| 4093 @code{\\bibliography@{..@}}. File names matched by any of these regexps | |
| 4094 will not be parsed. Intended for files which contain only | |
| 4095 @code{@@string} macro definitions and the like, which are ignored by | |
| 4096 @b{Ref@TeX{}} anyway.@refill | |
| 4097 @end defopt | |
| 4098 | |
| 4099 @defopt reftex-default-bibliography | |
| 4100 List of BibTeX database files which should be used if none are specified. | |
| 4101 When @code{reftex-citation} is called from a document with neither | |
| 4102 a @samp{\bibliography@{...@}} statement nor a @code{thebibliography} | |
| 4103 environment, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will scan these files instead. Intended for | |
| 4104 using @code{reftex-citation} in non-LaTeX files. The files will be | |
| 4105 searched along the BIBINPUTS or TEXBIB path.@refill | |
| 4106 @end defopt | |
| 4107 | |
| 4108 @defopt reftex-sort-bibtex-matches | |
| 4109 Sorting of the entries found in BibTeX databases by reftex-citation. | |
| 4110 Possible values:@refill | |
| 4111 @example | |
| 4112 nil @r{Do not sort entries.} | |
| 4113 author @r{Sort entries by author name.} | |
| 4114 year @r{Sort entries by increasing year.} | |
| 4115 reverse-year @r{Sort entries by decreasing year.} | |
| 4116 @end example | |
| 4117 @end defopt | |
| 4118 | |
| 4119 @defopt reftex-cite-format | |
| 4120 The format of citations to be inserted into the buffer. It can be a | |
| 4121 string, an alist or a symbol. In the simplest case this is just the string | |
| 4122 @samp{\cite@{%l@}}, which is also the default. See the definition of | |
| 4123 @code{reftex-cite-format-builtin} for more complex examples.@refill | |
| 4124 | |
| 4125 If @code{reftex-cite-format} is a string, it will be used as the format. | |
| 4126 In the format, the following percent escapes will be expanded.@refill | |
| 4127 | |
| 4128 @table @code | |
| 4129 @item %l | |
| 4130 The BibTeX label of the citation. | |
| 4131 @item %a | |
| 4132 List of author names, see also @code{reftex-cite-punctuation}. | |
| 4133 @item %2a | |
| 4134 Like %a, but abbreviate more than 2 authors like Jones et al. | |
| 4135 @item %A | |
| 4136 First author name only. | |
| 4137 @item %e | |
| 4138 Works like @samp{%a}, but on list of editor names. (@samp{%2e} and | |
| 4139 @samp{%E} work a well).@refill | |
| 4140 @end table | |
| 4141 | |
| 4142 It is also possible to access all other BibTeX database fields: | |
| 4143 | |
| 4144 @example | |
| 4145 %b booktitle %c chapter %d edition %h howpublished | |
| 4146 %i institution %j journal %k key %m month | |
| 4147 %n number %o organization %p pages %P first page | |
| 4148 %r address %s school %u publisher %t title | |
| 4149 %v volume %y year | |
| 4150 %B booktitle, abbreviated %T title, abbreviated | |
| 4151 @end example | |
| 4152 | |
| 4153 @noindent | |
| 4154 Usually, only @samp{%l} is needed. The other stuff is mainly for the | |
| 4155 echo area display, and for @code{(setq reftex-comment-citations t)}.@refill | |
| 4156 | |
| 4157 @samp{%<} as a special operator kills punctuation and space around it | |
| 4158 after the string has been formatted.@refill | |
| 4159 | |
| 4160 Beware that all this only works with BibTeX database files. When | |
| 4161 citations are made from the @code{\bibitems} in an explicit | |
| 4162 @code{thebibliography} environment, only @samp{%l} is available.@refill | |
| 4163 | |
| 4164 If @code{reftex-cite-format} is an alist of characters and strings, the | |
| 4165 user will be prompted for a character to select one of the possible | |
| 4166 format strings.@refill | |
| 4167 | |
| 4168 In order to configure this variable, you can either set | |
| 4169 @code{reftex-cite-format} directly yourself or set it to the | |
| 4170 @emph{symbol} of one of the predefined styles. The predefined symbols | |
| 4171 are those which have an association in the constant | |
| 4172 @code{reftex-cite-format-builtin}) E.g.: @code{(setq reftex-cite-format | |
| 4173 'natbib)}.@refill | |
| 4174 @end defopt | |
| 4175 | |
| 4176 @deffn Hook reftex-format-cite-function | |
| 4177 | |
| 4178 If non-@code{nil}, should be a function which produces the string to | |
| 4179 insert as a citation. Note that the citation format can also be changed | |
| 4180 with the variable @code{reftex-cite-format}. The function will be | |
| 4181 called with two arguments, the @var{citation-key} and the | |
| 4182 @var{default-format} (taken from @code{reftex-cite-format}). It should | |
| 4183 return the string to insert into the buffer.@refill | |
| 4184 @end deffn | |
| 4185 | |
| 4186 @defopt reftex-comment-citations | |
| 4187 Non-@code{nil} means add a comment for each citation describing the full | |
| 4188 entry. The comment is formatted according to | |
| 4189 @code{reftex-cite-comment-format}.@refill | |
| 4190 @end defopt | |
| 4191 | |
| 4192 @defopt reftex-cite-comment-format | |
| 4193 Citation format used for commented citations. Must @emph{not} contain | |
| 4194 @samp{%l}. See the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} for possible | |
| 4195 percent escapes.@refill | |
| 4196 @end defopt | |
| 4197 | |
| 4198 @defopt reftex-cite-punctuation | |
| 4199 Punctuation for formatting of name lists in citations. This is a list | |
| 4200 of 3 strings.@refill | |
| 4201 @enumerate | |
| 4202 @item | |
| 4203 normal names separator, like @samp{, } in Jones, Brown and Miller | |
| 4204 @item | |
| 4205 final names separator, like @samp{ and } in Jones, Brown and Miller | |
| 4206 @item | |
| 4207 The @samp{et al.} string, like @samp{ @{\it et al.@}} in | |
| 4208 Jones @{\it et al.@} | |
| 4209 @end enumerate | |
| 4210 @end defopt | |
| 4211 | |
| 4212 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-select-bib-mode-hook | |
| 4213 Normal hook which is run when a selection buffer enters | |
| 4214 @code{reftex-select-bib-mode}.@refill | |
| 4215 @end deffn | |
| 4216 | |
| 4217 @deffn Keymap reftex-select-bib-map | |
| 4218 The keymap which is active in the citation-key selection process | |
| 4219 (@pxref{Creating Citations}).@refill | |
| 4220 @end deffn | |
| 4221 | |
| 4222 @node Options (Index Support), Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options (Creating Citations), Options | |
| 4223 @section Index Support | |
| 4224 @cindex Options, Index support | |
| 4225 @cindex Index support, options | |
| 4226 | |
| 4227 @defopt reftex-support-index | |
| 4228 Non-@code{nil} means, index entries are parsed as well. Index support | |
| 4229 is resource intensive and the internal structure holding the parsed | |
| 4230 information can become quite big. Therefore it can be turned off. When | |
| 4231 this is @code{nil} and you execute a command which requires index | |
| 4232 support, you will be asked for confirmation to turn it on and rescan the | |
| 4233 document.@refill | |
| 4234 @end defopt | |
| 4235 | |
| 4236 @defopt reftex-index-special-chars | |
| 4237 List of special characters in index entries, given as strings. These | |
| 4238 correspond to the @code{MakeIndex} keywords | |
| 4239 @code{(@var{level} @var{encap} @var{actual} @var{quote} @var{escape})}. | |
| 4240 @end defopt | |
| 4241 | |
| 4242 @defopt reftex-index-macros | |
| 4243 List of macros which define index entries. The structure of each entry | |
| 4244 is | |
| 4245 @lisp | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4246 (@var{macro} @var{index-tag} @var{key} @var{prefix} @var{exclude} @var{repeat}) |
| 25829 | 4247 @end lisp |
| 4248 | |
| 4249 @var{macro} is the macro. Arguments should be denoted by empty braces, | |
| 4250 as for example in @samp{\index[]@{*@}}. Use square brackets to denote | |
| 4251 optional arguments. The star marks where the index key is.@refill | |
| 4252 | |
| 4253 @var{index-tag} is a short name of the index. @samp{idx} and @samp{glo} | |
| 4254 are reserved for the default index and the glossary. Other indices can | |
| 4255 be defined as well. If this is an integer, the Nth argument of the | |
| 4256 macro holds the index tag.@refill | |
| 4257 | |
| 4258 @var{key} is a character which is used to identify the macro for input | |
| 4259 with @code{reftex-index}. @samp{?i}, @samp{?I}, and @samp{?g} are | |
| 4260 reserved for default index and glossary.@refill | |
| 4261 | |
| 4262 @var{prefix} can be a prefix which is added to the @var{key} part of the | |
| 4263 index entry. If you have a macro | |
| 4264 @code{\newcommand@{\molec@}[1]@{#1\index@{Molecules!#1@}}, this prefix | |
| 4265 should be @samp{Molecules!}.@refill | |
| 4266 | |
| 4267 @var{exclude} can be a function. If this function exists and returns a | |
| 4268 non-nil value, the index entry at point is ignored. This was | |
| 4269 implemented to support the (deprecated) @samp{^} and @samp{_} shortcuts | |
| 4270 in the LaTeX2e @code{index} package.@refill | |
| 4271 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4272 @var{repeat}, if non-@code{nil}, means the index macro does not typeset |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4273 the entry in the text, so that the text has to be repeated outside the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4274 index macro. Needed for @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} and for |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4275 indexing from the phrase buffer.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4276 |
| 25829 | 4277 The final entry may also be a symbol. It must have an association in |
| 4278 the variable @code{reftex-index-macros-builtin} to specify the main | |
| 4279 indexing package you are using. Legal values are currently@refill | |
| 4280 @example | |
| 4281 default @r{The LaTeX default - unnecessary to specify this one} | |
| 4282 multind @r{The multind.sty package} | |
| 4283 index @r{The index.sty package} | |
| 4284 index-shortcut @r{The index.sty packages with the ^ and _ shortcuts.} | |
| 4285 @r{Should not be used - only for old documents} | |
| 4286 @end example | |
| 4287 Note that AUCTeX sets these things internally for @b{Ref@TeX{}} as well, | |
| 4288 so with a sufficiently new version of AUCTeX, you should not set the | |
| 4289 package here. | |
| 4290 @end defopt | |
| 4291 | |
| 4292 @defopt reftex-index-default-macro | |
| 4293 The default index macro for @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word}. | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4294 This is a list with @code{(@var{macro-key} @var{default-tag})}. |
| 25829 | 4295 |
| 4296 @var{macro-key} is a character identifying an index macro - see | |
| 4297 @code{reftex-index-macros}. | |
| 4298 | |
| 4299 @var{default-tag} is the tag to be used if the macro requires a | |
| 4300 @var{tag} argument. When this is @code{nil} and a @var{tag} is needed, | |
| 4301 @b{Ref@TeX{}} will ask for it. When this is the empty string and the | |
| 4302 TAG argument of the index macro is optional, the TAG argument will be | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4303 omitted.@refill |
| 25829 | 4304 @end defopt |
| 4305 | |
| 4306 @defopt reftex-index-default-tag | |
| 4307 Default index tag. When working with multiple indexes, RefTeX queries | |
| 4308 for an index tag when creating index entries or displaying a specific | |
| 4309 index. This variable controls the default offered for these queries. | |
| 4310 The default can be selected with @key{RET} during selection or | |
| 4311 completion. Legal values of this variable are:@refill | |
| 4312 @example | |
| 4313 nil @r{Do not provide a default index} | |
| 4314 "tag" @r{The default index tag given as a string, e.g. "idx"} | |
| 4315 last @r{The last used index tag will be offered as default} | |
| 4316 @end example | |
| 4317 @end defopt | |
| 4318 | |
| 4319 @defopt reftex-index-math-format | |
| 4320 Format of index entries when copied from inside math mode. When | |
| 4321 @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} is executed inside TeX math mode, | |
| 4322 the index key copied from the buffer is processed with this format | |
| 4323 string through the @code{format} function. This can be used to add the | |
| 4324 math delimiters (e.g. @samp{$}) to the string. Requires the | |
| 4325 @file{texmathp.el} library which is part of AUCTeX.@refill | |
| 4326 @end defopt | |
| 4327 | |
| 27195 | 4328 @defopt reftex-index-phrase-file-extension |
| 4329 File extension for the index phrase file. This extension will be added | |
| 4330 to the base name of the master file. | |
| 4331 @end defopt | |
| 4332 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4333 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-logical-and-regexp |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4334 Regexp matching the @samp{and} operator for index arguments in phrases |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4335 file. When several index arguments in a phrase line are separated by |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4336 this operator, each part will generate an index macro. So each match of |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4337 the search phrase will produce @emph{several} different index entries. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4338 Make sure this does no match things which are not separators. This |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4339 logical @samp{and} has higher priority than the logical @samp{or} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4340 specified in @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp}.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4341 @end defopt |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4342 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4343 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4344 Regexp matching the @samp{or} operator for index arguments in phrases |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4345 file. When several index arguments in a phrase line are separated by |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4346 this operator, the user will be asked to select one of them at each |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4347 match of the search phrase. The first index arg will be the default. A |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4348 number key @kbd{1}--@kbd{9} must be pressed to switch to another. Make |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4349 sure this does no match things which are not separators. The logical |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4350 @samp{and} specified in @code{reftex-index-phrases-logical-or-regexp} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4351 has higher priority than this logical @samp{or}.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4352 @end defopt |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4353 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4354 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-search-whole-words |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4355 Non-@code{nil} means phrases search will look for whole words, not subwords. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4356 This works by requiring word boundaries at the beginning and end of |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4357 the search string. When the search phrase already has a non-word-char |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4358 at one of these points, no word boundary is required there. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4359 @end defopt |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4360 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4361 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-case-fold-search |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4362 Non-@code{nil} means, searching for index phrases will ignore |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4363 case.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4364 @end defopt |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4365 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4366 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-skip-indexed-matches |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4367 Non-@code{nil} means, skip matches which appear to be indexed already. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4368 When doing global indexing from the phrases buffer, searches for some |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4369 phrases may match at places where that phrase was already indexed. In |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4370 particular when indexing an already processed document again, this |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4371 will even be the norm. When this variable is non-@code{nil}, |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4372 @b{Ref@TeX{}} checks if the match is an index macro argument, or if an |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4373 index macro is directly before or after the phrase. If that is the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4374 case, that match will be ignored.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4375 @end defopt |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4376 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4377 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-wrap-long-lines |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4378 Non-@code{nil} means, when indexing from the phrases buffer, wrap lines. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4379 Inserting indexing commands in a line makes the line longer - often |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4380 so long that it does not fit onto the screen. When this variable is |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4381 non-@code{nil}, newlines will be added as necessary before and/or after the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4382 indexing command to keep lines short. However, the matched text |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4383 phrase and its index command will always end up on a single line.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4384 @end defopt |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4385 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4386 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-prefers-entry |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4387 Non-@code{nil} means when sorting phrase lines, the explicit index entry |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4388 is used. Phrase lines in the phrases buffer contain a search phrase, and |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4389 sorting is normally based on these. Some phrase lines also have |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4390 an explicit index argument specified. When this variable is |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4391 non-@code{nil}, the index argument will be used for sorting.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4392 @end defopt |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4393 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4394 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-sort-in-blocks |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4395 Non-@code{nil} means, empty and comment lines separate phrase buffer |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4396 into blocks. Sorting will then preserve blocks, so that lines are |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4397 re-arranged only within blocks. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4398 @end defopt |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4399 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4400 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-map |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4401 Keymap for the Index Phrases buffer. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4402 @end defopt |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4403 |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4404 @defopt reftex-index-phrases-mode-hook |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4405 Normal hook which is run when a buffer is put into |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4406 @code{reftex-index-phrases-mode}.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4407 @end defopt |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4408 |
| 25829 | 4409 @defopt reftex-index-section-letters |
| 4410 The letters which denote sections in the index. Usually these are all | |
| 4411 capital letters. Don't use any downcase letters. Order is not | |
| 4412 significant, the index will be sorted by whatever the sort function | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4413 thinks is correct. In addition to these letters, @b{Ref@TeX{}} will |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4414 create a group @samp{!} which contains all entries sorted below the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4415 lowest specified letter. In the @file{*Index*} buffer, pressing any of |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4416 these capital letters or @kbd{!} will jump to that section.@refill |
| 25829 | 4417 @end defopt |
| 4418 | |
| 4419 @defopt reftex-index-include-context | |
| 4420 Non-@code{nil} means, display the index definition context in the | |
| 4421 @file{*Index*} buffer. This flag may also be toggled from the | |
| 4422 @file{*Index*} buffer with the @kbd{c} key. | |
| 4423 @end defopt | |
| 4424 | |
| 4425 @defopt reftex-index-follow-mode | |
| 4426 Non-@code{nil} means, point in @file{*Index*} buffer will cause other | |
| 4427 window to follow. The other window will show the corresponding part of | |
| 4428 the document. This flag can be toggled from within the @file{*Index*} | |
| 4429 buffer with the @kbd{f} key. | |
| 4430 @end defopt | |
| 4431 | |
| 4432 @deffn Keymap reftex-index-map | |
| 4433 The keymap which is active in the @file{*Index*} buffer | |
| 4434 (@pxref{Index Support}).@refill | |
| 4435 @end deffn | |
| 4436 | |
| 4437 @node Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options (Finding Files), Options (Index Support), Options | |
| 4438 @section Viewing Cross-References | |
| 4439 @cindex Options, viewing cross-references | |
| 4440 @cindex Viewing cross-references, options | |
| 4441 | |
| 4442 @defopt reftex-view-crossref-extra | |
| 4443 Macros which can be used for the display of cross references. | |
| 4444 This is used when `reftex-view-crossref' is called with point in an | |
| 4445 argument of a macro. Note that crossref viewing for citations, | |
| 4446 references (both ways) and index entries is hard-coded. This variable | |
| 4447 is only to configure additional structures for which crossreference | |
| 4448 viewing can be useful. Each entry has the structure | |
| 4449 @example | |
| 4450 (@var{macro-re} @var{search-re} @var{highlight}). | |
| 4451 @end example | |
| 4452 @var{macro-re} is matched against the macro. @var{search-re} is the | |
| 4453 regexp used to search for cross references. @samp{%s} in this regexp is | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
4454 replaced with with the macro argument at point. @var{highlight} is an |
| 25829 | 4455 integer indicating which subgroup of the match should be highlighted. |
| 4456 @end defopt | |
| 4457 | |
| 4458 @defopt reftex-auto-view-crossref | |
| 4459 Non-@code{nil} means, initially turn automatic viewing of crossref info | |
| 4460 on. Automatic viewing of crossref info normally uses the echo area. | |
| 4461 Whenever point is on the argument of a @code{\ref} or @code{\cite} | |
| 4462 macro, and no other message is being displayed, the echo area will | |
| 4463 display information about that cross reference. You can also set the | |
| 4464 variable to the symbol @code{window}. In this case a small temporary | |
| 4465 window is used for the display. This feature can be turned on and of | |
| 4466 from the menu (Ref->Options).@refill | |
| 4467 @end defopt | |
| 4468 | |
| 4469 @defopt reftex-idle-time | |
| 4470 Time (secs) Emacs has to be idle before automatic crossref display is | |
| 4471 done.@refill | |
| 4472 @end defopt | |
| 4473 | |
| 4474 @defopt reftex-cite-view-format | |
| 4475 Citation format used to display citation info in the message area. See | |
| 4476 the variable @code{reftex-cite-format} for possible percent | |
| 4477 escapes.@refill | |
| 4478 @end defopt | |
| 4479 | |
| 4480 @defopt reftex-revisit-to-echo | |
| 4481 Non-@code{nil} means, automatic citation display will revisit files if | |
| 4482 necessary. When nil, citation display in echo area will only be active | |
| 4483 for cached echo strings (see @code{reftex-cache-cite-echo}), or for | |
| 4484 BibTeX database files which are already visited by a live associated | |
| 4485 buffers.@refill | |
| 4486 @end defopt | |
| 4487 | |
| 4488 @defopt reftex-cache-cite-echo | |
| 4489 Non-@code{nil} means, the information displayed in the echo area for | |
| 4490 cite macros (see variable @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}) is cached and | |
| 4491 saved along with the parsing information. The cache survives document | |
| 4492 scans. In order to clear it, use @kbd{M-x reftex-reset-mode}. | |
| 4493 @end defopt | |
| 4494 | |
| 4495 @node Options (Finding Files), Options (Optimizations), Options (Viewing Cross-References), Options | |
| 4496 @section Finding Files | |
| 4497 @cindex Options, Finding Files | |
| 4498 @cindex Finding files, options | |
| 4499 | |
| 4500 @defopt reftex-texpath-environment-variables | |
| 4501 List of specifications how to retrieve the search path for TeX files. | |
| 4502 Several entries are possible.@refill | |
| 4503 @itemize @minus | |
| 4504 @item | |
| 4505 If an element is the name of an environment variable, its content is | |
| 4506 used.@refill | |
| 4507 @item | |
| 4508 If an element starts with an exclamation mark, it is used as a command | |
| 4509 to retrieve the path. A typical command with the kpathsearch library | |
| 4510 would be @w{@code{"!kpsewhich -show-path=.tex"}}. | |
| 4511 @item | |
| 4512 Otherwise the element itself is interpreted as a path. | |
| 4513 @end itemize | |
| 4514 Multiple directories can be separated by the system dependent | |
| 4515 @code{path-separator}. Directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!} will | |
| 4516 be expanded recursively. See also @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}. | |
| 4517 @end defopt | |
| 4518 | |
| 4519 @defopt reftex-bibpath-environment-variables | |
| 4520 List of specifications how to retrieve the search path for BibTeX | |
| 4521 files. Several entries are possible.@refill | |
| 4522 @itemize @minus | |
| 4523 @item | |
| 4524 If an element is the name of an environment variable, its content is | |
| 4525 used.@refill | |
| 4526 @item | |
| 4527 If an element starts with an exclamation mark, it is used as a command | |
| 4528 to retrieve the path. A typical command with the kpathsearch library | |
| 4529 would be @w{@code{"!kpsewhich -show-path=.bib"}}. | |
| 4530 @item | |
| 4531 Otherwise the element itself is interpreted as a path. | |
| 4532 @end itemize | |
| 4533 Multiple directories can be separated by the system dependent | |
| 4534 @code{path-separator}. Directories ending in @samp{//} or @samp{!!} will | |
| 4535 be expanded recursively. See also @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}. | |
| 4536 @end defopt | |
| 4537 | |
| 4538 @defopt reftex-file-extensions | |
| 4539 Association list with file extensions for different file types. | |
| 4540 This is a list of items, each item is like: | |
| 4541 @code{(@var{type} . (@var{def-ext} @var{other-ext} ...))} | |
| 4542 @example | |
| 4543 @var{type}: @r{File type like @code{"bib"} or @code{"tex"}.} | |
| 4544 @var{def-ext}: @r{The default extension for that file type, like @code{".tex"} or @code{".bib"}.} | |
| 4545 @var{other-ext}: @r{Any number of other legal extensions for this file type.} | |
| 4546 @end example | |
| 4547 When a files is searched and it does not have any of the legal extensions, | |
| 4548 we try the default extension first, and then the naked file name.@refill | |
| 4549 @end defopt | |
| 4550 | |
| 4551 @defopt reftex-search-unrecursed-path-first | |
| 4552 Non-@code{nil} means, search all specified directories before trying | |
| 4553 recursion. Thus, in a path @samp{.//:/tex/}, search first @samp{./}, | |
| 4554 then @samp{/tex/}, and then all subdirectories of @samp{./}. If this | |
| 4555 option is @code{nil}, the subdirectories of @samp{./} are searched | |
| 4556 before @samp{/tex/}. This is mainly for speed - most of the time the | |
| 4557 recursive path is for the system files and not for the user files. Set | |
| 4558 this to @code{nil} if the default makes @b{Ref@TeX{}} finding files with | |
| 4559 equal names in wrong sequence.@refill | |
| 4560 @end defopt | |
| 4561 | |
| 4562 @defopt reftex-use-external-file-finders | |
| 4563 Non-@code{nil} means, use external programs to find files. Normally, | |
| 4564 @b{Ref@TeX{}} searches the paths given in the environment variables | |
| 4565 @code{TEXINPUTS} and @code{BIBINPUTS} to find TeX files and BibTeX | |
| 4566 database files. With this option turned on, it calls an external | |
| 4567 program specified in the option @code{reftex-external-file-finders} | |
| 4568 instead. As a side effect, the variables | |
| 4569 @code{reftex-texpath-environment-variables} and | |
| 4570 @code{reftex-bibpath-environment-variables} will be ignored. | |
| 4571 @end defopt | |
| 4572 | |
| 4573 @defopt reftex-external-file-finders | |
| 4574 Association list with external programs to call for finding files. Each | |
| 4575 entry is a cons cell @w{@code{(@var{type} . @var{program})}}. | |
| 4576 @var{type} is either @code{"tex"} or @code{"bib"}. @var{program} is a | |
| 4577 string containing the external program to use with any arguments. | |
| 4578 @code{%f} will be replaced by the name of the file to be found. Note | |
| 4579 that these commands will be executed directly, not via a shell. Only | |
| 4580 relevant when @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders} is | |
| 4581 non-@code{nil}.@refill | |
| 4582 @end defopt | |
| 4583 | |
| 4584 @page | |
| 4585 @node Options (Optimizations), Options (Fontification), Options (Finding Files), Options | |
| 4586 @section Optimizations | |
| 4587 @cindex Options, optimizations | |
| 4588 @cindex Optimizations, options | |
| 4589 | |
| 4590 @defopt reftex-keep-temporary-buffers | |
| 4591 Non-@code{nil} means, keep buffers created for parsing and lookup. | |
| 4592 @b{Ref@TeX{}} sometimes needs to visit files related to the current | |
| 4593 document. We distinguish files visited for@refill | |
| 4594 @table @asis | |
| 4595 @item PARSING | |
| 4596 Parts of a multifile document loaded when (re)-parsing the | |
| 4597 document.@refill | |
| 4598 @item LOOKUP | |
| 4599 BibTeX database files and TeX files loaded to find a reference, to | |
| 4600 display label context, etc.@refill | |
| 4601 @end table | |
| 4602 The created buffers can be kept for later use, or be thrown away | |
| 4603 immediately after use, depending on the value of this variable:@refill | |
| 4604 | |
| 4605 @table @code | |
| 4606 @item nil | |
| 4607 Throw away as much as possible. | |
| 4608 @item t | |
| 4609 Keep everything. | |
| 4610 @item 1 | |
| 4611 Throw away buffers created for parsing, but keep the ones created for | |
| 4612 lookup.@refill | |
| 4613 @end table | |
| 4614 | |
| 4615 If a buffer is to be kept, the file is visited normally (which is | |
| 4616 potentially slow but will happen only once). If a buffer is to be thrown | |
| 4617 away, the initialization of the buffer depends upon the variable | |
| 4618 @code{reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers}.@refill | |
| 4619 @end defopt | |
| 4620 | |
| 4621 @defopt reftex-initialize-temporary-buffers | |
| 4622 Non-@code{nil} means do initializations even when visiting file | |
| 4623 temporarily. When @code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} may turn off find-file hooks and | |
| 4624 other stuff to briefly visit a file. When @code{t}, the full default | |
| 4625 initializations are done (@code{find-file-hook} etc.). Instead of | |
| 4626 @code{t} or @code{nil}, this variable may also be a list of hook | |
| 4627 functions to do a minimal initialization.@refill | |
| 4628 @end defopt | |
| 4629 | |
| 4630 @defopt reftex-no-include-regexps | |
| 4631 List of regular expressions to exclude certain input files from parsing. | |
| 4632 If the name of a file included via @code{\include} or @code{\input} is | |
| 4633 matched by any of the regular expressions in this list, that file is not | |
| 4634 parsed by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
| 4635 @end defopt | |
| 4636 | |
| 4637 @defopt reftex-enable-partial-scans | |
| 4638 Non-@code{nil} means, re-parse only 1 file when asked to re-parse. | |
| 4639 Re-parsing is normally requested with a @kbd{C-u} prefix to many @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
| 4640 commands, or with the @kbd{r} key in menus. When this option is | |
| 4641 @code{t} in a multifile document, we will only parse the current buffer, | |
| 4642 or the file associated with the label or section heading near point in a | |
| 4643 menu. Requesting re-parsing of an entire multifile document then | |
| 4644 requires a @kbd{C-u C-u} prefix or the capital @kbd{R} key in | |
| 4645 menus.@refill | |
| 4646 @end defopt | |
| 4647 | |
| 4648 @defopt reftex-save-parse-info | |
| 4649 Non-@code{nil} means, save information gathered with parsing in files. | |
| 4650 The file @file{MASTER.rel} in the same directory as @file{MASTER.tex} is | |
| 4651 used to save the information. When this variable is @code{t}, | |
| 4652 @itemize @minus | |
| 4653 @item | |
| 4654 accessing the parsing information for the first time in an editing | |
| 4655 session will read that file (if available) instead of parsing the | |
| 4656 document.@refill | |
| 4657 @item | |
| 4658 exiting Emacs or killing a buffer in reftex-mode will cause a new | |
| 4659 version of the file to be written.@refill | |
| 4660 @end itemize | |
| 4661 @end defopt | |
| 4662 | |
| 27195 | 4663 @defopt reftex-parse-file-extension |
| 4664 File extension for the file in which parser information is stored. | |
| 4665 This extension is added to the base name of the master file. | |
| 4666 @end defopt | |
| 4667 | |
| 25829 | 4668 @defopt reftex-allow-automatic-rescan |
| 4669 Non-@code{nil} means, @b{Ref@TeX{}} may rescan the document when this seems | |
| 4670 necessary. Applies (currently) only in rare cases, when a new label | |
| 4671 cannot be placed with certainty into the internal label list. | |
| 4672 @end defopt | |
| 4673 | |
| 4674 @defopt reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers | |
| 4675 Non-@code{nil} means use a separate selection buffer for each label | |
| 4676 type. These buffers are kept from one selection to the next and need | |
| 4677 not to be created for each use - so the menu generally comes up faster. | |
| 4678 The selection buffers will be erased (and therefore updated) | |
| 4679 automatically when new labels in its category are added. See the | |
| 4680 variable @code{reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers}.@refill | |
| 4681 @end defopt | |
| 4682 | |
| 4683 @defopt reftex-auto-update-selection-buffers | |
| 4684 Non-@code{nil} means, selection buffers will be updated automatically. | |
| 4685 When a new label is defined with @code{reftex-label}, all selection | |
| 4686 buffers associated with that label category are emptied, in order to | |
| 4687 force an update upon next use. When @code{nil}, the buffers are left | |
| 4688 alone and have to be updated by hand, with the @kbd{g} key from the | |
| 4689 label selection process. The value of this variable will only have any | |
| 4690 effect when @code{reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers} is | |
| 4691 non-@code{nil}.@refill | |
| 4692 @end defopt | |
| 4693 | |
| 4694 @node Options (Fontification), Options (Misc), Options (Optimizations), Options | |
| 4695 @section Fontification | |
| 4696 @cindex Options, fontification | |
| 4697 @cindex Fontification, options | |
| 4698 | |
| 4699 @defopt reftex-use-fonts | |
| 4700 Non-@code{nil} means, use fonts in label menu and on-the-fly help. | |
| 4701 Font-lock must be loaded as well to actually get fontified | |
| 4702 display. After changing this option, a rescan may be necessary to | |
| 4703 activate it.@refill | |
| 4704 @end defopt | |
| 4705 | |
| 4706 @defopt reftex-refontify-context | |
| 4707 Non-@code{nil} means, re-fontify the context in the label menu with | |
| 4708 font-lock. This slightly slows down the creation of the label menu. It | |
| 4709 is only necessary when you definitely want the context fontified.@refill | |
| 4710 | |
| 4711 This option may have 3 different values: | |
| 4712 @table @code | |
| 4713 @item nil | |
| 4714 Never refontify. | |
| 4715 @item t | |
| 4716 Always refontify. | |
| 4717 @item 1 | |
| 4718 Refontify when necessary, e.g. with old versions of the x-symbol | |
| 4719 package.@refill | |
| 4720 @end table | |
| 4721 The option is ignored when @code{reftex-use-fonts} is @code{nil}.@refill | |
| 4722 @end defopt | |
| 4723 | |
| 4724 @defopt reftex-highlight-selection | |
| 4725 Non-@code{nil} means, highlight selected text in selection and | |
| 4726 @file{*toc*} buffers. Normally, the text near the cursor is the | |
| 4727 @emph{selected} text, and it is highlighted. This is the entry most | |
| 4728 keys in the selection and @file{*toc*} buffers act on. However, if you | |
| 4729 mainly use the mouse to select an item, you may find it nice to have | |
| 4730 mouse-triggered highlighting @emph{instead} or @emph{as well}. The | |
| 4731 variable may have one of these values:@refill | |
| 4732 | |
| 4733 @example | |
| 4734 nil @r{No highlighting.} | |
| 4735 cursor @r{Highlighting is cursor driven.} | |
| 4736 mouse @r{Highlighting is mouse driven.} | |
| 4737 both @r{Both cursor and mouse trigger highlighting.} | |
| 4738 @end example | |
| 4739 | |
| 4740 Changing this variable requires to rebuild the selection and *toc* | |
| 4741 buffers to become effective (keys @kbd{g} or @kbd{r}).@refill | |
| 4742 @end defopt | |
| 4743 | |
| 4744 @defopt reftex-cursor-selected-face | |
| 4745 Face name to highlight cursor selected item in toc and selection buffers. | |
| 4746 See also the variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}.@refill | |
| 4747 @end defopt | |
| 4748 @defopt reftex-mouse-selected-face | |
| 4749 Face name to highlight mouse selected item in toc and selection buffers. | |
| 4750 See also the variable @code{reftex-highlight-selection}.@refill | |
| 4751 @end defopt | |
| 4752 @defopt reftex-file-boundary-face | |
| 4753 Face name for file boundaries in selection buffer. | |
| 4754 @end defopt | |
| 4755 @defopt reftex-label-face | |
| 4756 Face name for labels in selection buffer. | |
| 4757 @end defopt | |
| 4758 @defopt reftex-section-heading-face | |
| 4759 Face name for section headings in toc and selection buffers. | |
| 4760 @end defopt | |
| 4761 @defopt reftex-toc-header-face | |
| 4762 Face name for the header of a toc buffer. | |
| 4763 @end defopt | |
| 4764 @defopt reftex-bib-author-face | |
| 4765 Face name for author names in bib selection buffer. | |
| 4766 @end defopt | |
| 4767 @defopt reftex-bib-year-face | |
| 4768 Face name for year in bib selection buffer. | |
| 4769 @end defopt | |
| 4770 @defopt reftex-bib-title-face | |
| 4771 Face name for article title in bib selection buffer. | |
| 4772 @end defopt | |
| 4773 @defopt reftex-bib-extra-face | |
| 4774 Face name for bibliographic information in bib selection buffer. | |
| 4775 @end defopt | |
| 4776 @defopt reftex-select-mark-face | |
| 4777 Face name for marked entries in the selection buffers. | |
| 4778 @end defopt | |
| 4779 @defopt reftex-index-header-face | |
| 4780 Face name for the header of an index buffer. | |
| 4781 @end defopt | |
| 4782 @defopt reftex-index-section-face | |
| 4783 Face name for the start of a new letter section in the index. | |
| 4784 @end defopt | |
| 4785 @defopt reftex-index-tag-face | |
| 4786 Face name for index names (for multiple indices). | |
| 4787 @end defopt | |
| 4788 @defopt reftex-index-face | |
| 4789 Face name for index entries. | |
| 4790 @end defopt | |
| 4791 | |
| 4792 @node Options (Misc), , Options (Fontification), Options | |
| 4793 @section Miscellaneous | |
| 4794 @cindex Options, misc | |
| 4795 | |
| 4796 @defopt reftex-extra-bindings | |
| 4797 Non-@code{nil} means, make additional key bindings on startup. These | |
| 4798 extra bindings are located in the users @samp{C-c letter} | |
| 39267 | 4799 map. @xref{Key Bindings}.@refill |
| 25829 | 4800 @end defopt |
| 4801 | |
| 4802 @defopt reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX | |
| 4803 Plug-in flags for AUCTeX interface. This variable is a list of | |
| 4804 5 boolean flags. When a flag is non-@code{nil}, @b{Ref@TeX{}} | |
| 4805 will@refill | |
| 4806 | |
| 4807 @example | |
| 4808 - supply labels in new sections and environments (flag 1) | |
| 4809 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\label} (flag 2) | |
| 4810 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\ref} (flag 3) | |
| 4811 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\cite} (flag 4) | |
| 4812 - supply arguments for macros like @code{\index} (flag 5) | |
| 4813 @end example | |
| 4814 | |
| 4815 You may also set the variable itself to t or nil in order to turn all | |
| 4816 options on or off, respectively.@* | |
| 4817 Supplying labels in new sections and environments applies when creating | |
| 4818 sections with @kbd{C-c C-s} and environments with @kbd{C-c C-e}.@* | |
| 4819 Supplying macro arguments applies when you insert such a macro | |
| 4820 interactively with @kbd{C-c @key{RET}}.@* | |
| 4821 See the AUCTeX documentation for more information. | |
| 4822 @end defopt | |
| 4823 | |
| 4824 @defopt reftex-revisit-to-follow | |
| 4825 Non-@code{nil} means, follow-mode will revisit files if necessary. | |
| 4826 When nil, follow-mode will be suspended for stuff in unvisited files. | |
| 4827 @end defopt | |
| 4828 | |
| 4829 @defopt reftex-allow-detached-macro-args | |
| 4830 Non-@code{nil} means, allow arguments of macros to be detached by | |
| 4831 whitespace. When this is @code{t}, the @samp{aaa} in @w{@samp{\bbb | |
| 4832 [xxx] @{aaa@}}} will be considered an argument of @code{\bb}. Note that | |
| 4833 this will be the case even if @code{\bb} is defined with zero or one | |
| 4834 argument.@refill | |
| 4835 @end defopt | |
| 4836 | |
| 4837 @node Keymaps and Hooks, Changes, Options, Top | |
| 4838 @section Keymaps and Hooks | |
| 4839 @cindex Keymaps | |
| 4840 | |
| 4841 @b{Ref@TeX{}} has the usual general keymap and load-- and mode-hook. | |
| 4842 | |
| 4843 @deffn Keymap reftex-mode-map | |
| 4844 The keymap for @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode. | |
| 4845 @end deffn | |
| 4846 | |
| 4847 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-load-hook | |
| 4848 Normal hook which is being run when loading @file{reftex.el}. | |
| 4849 @end deffn | |
| 4850 | |
| 4851 @deffn {Normal Hook} reftex-mode-hook | |
| 4852 Normal hook which is being run when turning on @b{Ref@TeX{}} mode.@refill | |
| 4853 @end deffn | |
| 4854 | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4855 Furthermore, the 4 modes used for referencing labels, creating |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4856 citations, the table of contents buffer and the phrases buffer have |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4857 their own keymaps and mode hooks. See the respective sections. There |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4858 are many more hooks which are described in the relevant sections about |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
4859 options for a specific part of @b{Ref@TeX{}}.@refill |
| 25829 | 4860 |
| 4861 @node Changes, , Keymaps and Hooks, Top | |
| 4862 @chapter Changes | |
| 4863 @cindex Changes | |
| 4864 | |
| 4865 Here is a list of recent changes to @b{Ref@TeX{}}. | |
| 4866 | |
| 4867 @ignore | |
| 4868 @noindent @b{Version 1.00} | |
| 4869 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4870 @item | |
| 4871 released on 7 Jan 1997. | |
| 4872 @end itemize | |
| 4873 | |
| 4874 @noindent @b{Version 1.04} | |
| 4875 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4876 @item | |
| 4877 Macros as wrappers, AMSTeX support, delayed context parsing for | |
| 4878 new labels.@refill | |
| 4879 @end itemize | |
| 4880 | |
| 4881 @noindent @b{Version 1.05} | |
| 4882 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4883 @item | |
| 4884 XEmacs port. | |
| 4885 @end itemize | |
| 4886 | |
| 4887 @noindent @b{Version 1.07} | |
| 4888 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4889 @item | |
| 4890 @b{Ref@TeX{}} gets its own menu. | |
| 4891 @end itemize | |
| 4892 | |
| 4893 @noindent @b{Version 1.09} | |
| 4894 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4895 @item | |
| 4896 Support for @code{tex-main-file}, an analogue for | |
| 4897 @code{TeX-master}.@refill | |
| 4898 @item | |
| 4899 MS-DOS support. | |
| 4900 @end itemize | |
| 4901 | |
| 4902 @noindent @b{Version 2.00} | |
| 4903 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4904 @item | |
| 4905 Labels can be derived from context (default for sections). | |
| 4906 @item | |
| 4907 Configuration of label insertion and label referencing revised. | |
| 4908 @item | |
| 4909 Crossref fields in BibTeX database entries. | |
| 4910 @item | |
| 4911 @code{reftex-toc} introduced (thanks to Stephen Eglen). | |
| 4912 @end itemize | |
| 4913 | |
| 4914 @noindent @b{Version 2.03} | |
| 4915 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4916 @item | |
| 4917 @code{figure*}, @code{table*}, @code{sidewaysfigure/table} added to | |
| 4918 default environments.@refill | |
| 4919 @item | |
| 4920 @code{reftex-bibfile-ignore-list} introduced (thanks to Rory Molinari). | |
| 4921 @item | |
| 4922 New functions @code{reftex-arg-label}, @code{reftex-arg-ref}, | |
| 4923 @code{reftex-arg-cite}.@refill | |
| 4924 @item | |
| 4925 Emacs/XEmacs compatibility reworked. XEmacs 19.15 now is | |
| 4926 required.@refill | |
| 4927 @item | |
| 4928 @code{reftex-add-to-label-alist} (to be called from AUCTeX style | |
| 4929 files).@refill | |
| 4930 @item | |
| 4931 Finding context with a hook function. | |
| 4932 @item | |
| 4933 Sorting BibTeX entries (new variable: | |
| 4934 @code{reftex-sort-bibtex-matches}). | |
| 4935 @end itemize | |
| 4936 | |
| 4937 @noindent @b{Version 2.05} | |
| 4938 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4939 @item | |
| 4940 Support for @file{custom.el}. | |
| 4941 @item | |
| 4942 New function @code{reftex-grep-document} (thanks to Stephen Eglen). | |
| 4943 @end itemize | |
| 4944 | |
| 4945 @noindent @b{Version 2.07} | |
| 4946 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4947 @item | |
| 4948 New functions @code{reftex-search-document}, | |
| 4949 @code{reftex-query-replace-document}. | |
| 4950 @end itemize | |
| 4951 | |
| 4952 @noindent @b{Version 2.11} | |
| 4953 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4954 @item | |
| 4955 Submitted for inclusion to Emacs and XEmacs. | |
| 4956 @end itemize | |
| 4957 | |
| 4958 @noindent @b{Version 2.14} | |
| 4959 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4960 @item | |
| 4961 Variable @code{reftex-plug-into-AUCTeX} simplifies cooperation with | |
| 4962 AUCTeX.@refill | |
| 4963 @end itemize | |
| 4964 | |
| 4965 @noindent @b{Version 2.17} | |
| 4966 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4967 @item | |
| 4968 Label prefix expands % escapes with current file name and other stuff. | |
| 4969 @item | |
| 4970 Citation format now with % escapes. This is not backward | |
| 4971 compatible!@refill | |
| 4972 @item | |
| 4973 TEXINPUTS variable recognized when looking for input files. | |
| 4974 @item | |
| 4975 Context can be the nth argument of a macro.@refill | |
| 4976 @item | |
| 4977 Searching in the select buffer is now possible (@kbd{C-s} and | |
| 4978 @kbd{C-r}).@refill | |
| 4979 @item | |
| 4980 Display and derive-label can use two different context methods. | |
| 4981 @item | |
| 4982 AMSmath @code{xalignat} and @code{xxalignat} added. | |
| 4983 @end itemize | |
| 4984 | |
| 4985 @noindent @b{Version 3.00} | |
| 4986 @itemize @bullet | |
| 4987 @item | |
| 4988 @b{Ref@TeX{}} should work better for very large projects: | |
| 4989 @item | |
| 4990 The new parser works without creating a master buffer. | |
| 4991 @item | |
| 4992 Rescanning can be limited to a part of a multifile document. | |
| 4993 @item | |
| 4994 Information from the parser can be stored in a file. | |
| 4995 @item | |
| 4996 @b{Ref@TeX{}} can deal with macros having a naked label as an argument. | |
| 4997 @item | |
| 4998 Macros may have white space and newlines between arguments. | |
| 4999 @item | |
| 5000 Multiple identical section headings no longer confuse | |
| 5001 @code{reftex-toc}.@refill | |
| 5002 @item | |
| 5003 @b{Ref@TeX{}} should work correctly in combination with buffer-altering | |
| 5004 packages like outline, folding, x-symbol, iso-cvt, isotex, etc.@refill | |
| 5005 @item | |
| 5006 All labeled environments discussed in @emph{The LaTeX Companion} by | |
| 5007 Goossens, Mittelbach & Samarin, Addison-Wesley 1994) are part of | |
| 5008 @b{Ref@TeX{}}'s defaults.@refill | |
| 5009 @end itemize | |
| 5010 | |
| 5011 @noindent @b{Version 3.03} | |
| 5012 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5013 @item | |
| 5014 Support for the LaTeX package @code{xr}, for inter-document | |
| 5015 references.@refill | |
| 5016 @item | |
| 5017 A few (minor) Mule-related changes. | |
| 5018 @item | |
| 5019 Fixed bug which could cause @emph{huge} @file{.rel} files. | |
| 5020 @item | |
| 5021 Search for input and @file{.bib} files with recursive path definitions. | |
| 5022 @end itemize | |
| 5023 | |
| 5024 @noindent @b{Version 3.04} | |
| 5025 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5026 @item | |
| 5027 Fixed BUG in the @emph{xr} support. | |
| 5028 @end itemize | |
| 5029 | |
| 5030 @noindent @b{Version 3.05} | |
| 5031 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5032 @item | |
| 5033 Compatibility code now first checks for XEmacs feature. | |
| 5034 @end itemize | |
| 5035 | |
| 5036 @noindent @b{Version 3.07} | |
| 5037 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5038 @item | |
| 5039 @code{Ref} menu improved. | |
| 5040 @end itemize | |
| 5041 | |
| 5042 @noindent @b{Version 3.10} | |
| 5043 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5044 @item | |
| 5045 Fixed a bug which made reftex 3.07 fail on [X]Emacs version 19. | |
| 5046 @item | |
| 5047 Removed unimportant code which caused OS/2 Emacs to crash. | |
| 5048 @item | |
| 5049 All customization variables now accessible from menu. | |
| 5050 @end itemize | |
| 5051 | |
| 5052 @noindent @b{Version 3.11} | |
| 5053 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5054 @item | |
| 5055 Fixed bug which led to naked label in (e.g.) footnotes. | |
| 5056 @item | |
| 5057 Added scroll-other-window functions to RefTeX-Select. | |
| 5058 @end itemize | |
| 5059 | |
| 5060 @noindent @b{Version 3.12} | |
| 5061 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5062 @item | |
| 5063 There are 3 new keymaps for customization: @code{reftex-toc-map}, | |
| 5064 @code{reftex-select-label-map}, @code{reftex-select-bib-map}. | |
| 5065 @item | |
| 5066 Refontification uses more standard font-lock stuff. | |
| 5067 @item | |
| 5068 When no BibTeX database files are specified, citations can also use | |
| 5069 @code{\bibitem} entries from a @code{thebibliography} environment.@refill | |
| 5070 @end itemize | |
| 5071 | |
| 5072 @noindent @b{Version 3.14} | |
| 5073 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5074 @item | |
| 5075 Selection buffers can be kept between selections: this is faster. | |
| 5076 See new variable @code{reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers}.@refill | |
| 5077 @item | |
| 5078 Prefix interpretation of reftex-view-crossref changed. | |
| 5079 @item | |
| 5080 Support for the @code{varioref} package (@kbd{v} key in selection | |
| 5081 buffer).@refill | |
| 5082 @end itemize | |
| 5083 | |
| 5084 @noindent @b{Version 3.16} | |
| 5085 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5086 @item | |
| 5087 New hooks @code{reftex-format-label-function}, | |
| 5088 @code{reftex-format-ref-function}, @code{reftex-format-cite-function}.@refill | |
| 5089 @item | |
| 5090 TeXInfo documentation completed. | |
| 5091 @item | |
| 5092 Some restrictions in Label inserting and referencing removed. | |
| 5093 @item | |
| 5094 New variable @code{reftex-default-bibliography}. | |
| 5095 @end itemize | |
| 5096 | |
| 5097 @noindent @b{Version 3.17} | |
| 5098 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5099 @item | |
| 5100 Additional bindings in selection and @file{*toc*} buffers. @kbd{g} | |
| 5101 redefined. | |
| 5102 @item | |
| 5103 New command @code{reftex-save-all-document-buffers}. | |
| 5104 @item | |
| 5105 Magic word matching made more intelligent. | |
| 5106 @item | |
| 5107 Selection process can switch to completion (with @key{TAB}). | |
| 5108 @item | |
| 5109 @code{\appendix} is now recognized and influences section numbering. | |
| 5110 @item | |
| 5111 File commentary shortened considerably (use Info documentation). | |
| 5112 @item | |
| 5113 New option @code{reftex-no-include-regexps} to skip some include files. | |
| 5114 @item | |
| 5115 New option @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow}. | |
| 5116 @end itemize | |
| 5117 | |
| 5118 @noindent @b{Version 3.18} | |
| 5119 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5120 @item | |
| 5121 The selection now uses a recursive edit, much like minibuffer input. | |
| 5122 This removes all restrictions during selection. E.g. you can now | |
| 5123 switch buffers at will, use the mouse etc.@refill | |
| 5124 @item | |
| 5125 New option @code{reftex-highlight-selection}. | |
| 5126 @item | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
5127 @kbd{mouse-2} can be used to select in selection and @file{*toc*} |
| 25829 | 5128 buffers.@refill |
| 5129 @item | |
| 5130 Fixed some problems regarding the interaction with VIPER mode. | |
| 5131 @item | |
| 5132 Follow-mode is now only used after point motion. | |
| 5133 @item | |
| 5134 @b{Ref@TeX{}} now finally does not fontify temporary files anymore. | |
| 5135 @end itemize | |
| 5136 | |
| 5137 @noindent @b{Version 3.19} | |
| 5138 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5139 @item | |
| 5140 Fixed bug with AUCTeX @code{TeX-master}. | |
| 5141 @end itemize | |
| 5142 | |
| 5143 @noindent @b{Version 3.21} | |
| 5144 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5145 @item | |
| 5146 New options for all faces used by @b{Ref@TeX{}}. They're in the | |
| 5147 customization group @code{reftex-fontification-configurations}.@refill | |
| 5148 @end itemize | |
| 5149 | |
| 5150 @noindent @b{Version 3.22} | |
| 5151 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5152 @item | |
| 5153 Fixed bug with empty context strings. | |
| 5154 @item | |
| 5155 @code{reftex-mouse-view-crossref} is now bound by default at | |
|
37999
8e7df927fd92
Updated to version 4.16
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
37404
diff
changeset
|
5156 @kbd{S-mouse-2}.@refill |
| 25829 | 5157 @end itemize |
| 5158 | |
| 5159 @noindent @b{Version 3.23} | |
| 5160 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5161 @item | |
| 5162 Parse files @file{MASTER.rel} made compatible between Emacs and XEmacs. | |
| 5163 @item | |
| 5164 @code{kill-emacs-hook} and @code{kill-buffer-hook} now write the parse | |
| 5165 file. | |
| 5166 @item | |
| 5167 The cursor inside a @code{\ref} or @code{\cite} macro can now trigger | |
| 5168 automatic display of crossref information in the echo area. See | |
| 5169 variable @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}. | |
| 5170 @item | |
| 5171 AUCTeX interface updates: | |
| 5172 @itemize @minus | |
| 5173 @item | |
| 5174 AUCTeX 9.9c and later notifies @b{Ref@TeX{}} about new sections. | |
| 5175 @item | |
| 5176 @b{Ref@TeX{}} notifies AUCTeX about new labels. | |
| 5177 @item | |
| 5178 @code{TeX-arg-ref} no longer used (introduction was unnecessary). | |
| 5179 @item | |
| 5180 @code{reftex-arg-label} and @code{reftex-arg-cite} fixed up. | |
| 5181 @item | |
| 5182 Settings added to @b{Ref@TeX{}} via style files remain local. | |
| 5183 @end itemize | |
| 5184 @item | |
| 5185 Fixed bug with @code{reftex-citation} in non-latex buffers. | |
| 5186 @item | |
| 5187 Fixed bug with syntax table and context refontification. | |
| 5188 @item | |
| 5189 Safety-net for name change of @code{font-lock-reference-face}. | |
| 5190 @end itemize | |
| 5191 | |
| 5192 @noindent @b{Version 3.24} | |
| 5193 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5194 @item | |
| 5195 New option @code{reftex-revisit-to-echo}. | |
| 5196 @item | |
| 5197 Interface with X-Symbol (>=2.6) is now complete and stable. | |
| 5198 @item | |
| 5199 Adapted to new outline, which uses overlays. | |
| 5200 @item | |
| 5201 File names in @code{\bibliography} may now have the @code{.bib} | |
| 5202 extension.@refill | |
| 5203 @item | |
| 5204 Fixed Bug with parsing "single file" from master file buffer. | |
| 5205 @end itemize | |
| 5206 | |
| 5207 @noindent @b{Version 3.25} | |
| 5208 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5209 @item | |
| 5210 Echoing of citation info caches the info for displayed entries. | |
| 5211 New option @code{reftex-cache-cite-echo}.@refill | |
| 5212 @item | |
| 5213 @kbd{M-x reftex-reset-mode} now also removes the file with parsing | |
| 5214 info.@refill | |
| 5215 @item | |
| 5216 Default of @code{reftex-revisit-to-follow} changed to nil. | |
| 5217 @end itemize | |
| 5218 | |
| 5219 @noindent @b{Version 3.26} | |
| 5220 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5221 @item | |
| 5222 [X]Emacs 19 no longer supported. Use 3.22 for Emacs 19. | |
| 5223 @item | |
| 5224 New hooks @code{reftex-translate-to-ascii-function}, | |
| 5225 @code{reftex-string-to-label-function}.@refill | |
| 5226 @item | |
| 5227 Made sure automatic crossref display will not visit/scan files. | |
| 5228 @end itemize | |
| 5229 | |
| 5230 @noindent @b{Version 3.27} | |
| 5231 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5232 @item | |
| 5233 Macros can define @emph{neutral} labels, just like @code{\label} | |
| 5234 itself.@refill | |
| 5235 @item | |
| 5236 New option @code{reftex-allow-detached-macro-args}, default @code{nil}! | |
| 5237 @end itemize | |
| 5238 | |
| 5239 @noindent @b{Version 3.28} | |
| 5240 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5241 @item | |
| 5242 Auto view crossref for XEmacs uses @code{post-command-hook} to restart the | |
| 5243 timer, since itimer restart is not reliable.@refill | |
| 5244 @item | |
| 5245 Option @code{reftex-bibfile-ignore-list} renamed to @code{-regexps}. | |
| 5246 @item | |
| 5247 Expansion of recursive tex and bib path rewritten. | |
| 5248 @item | |
| 5249 Fixed problem where @b{Ref@TeX{}} did not scan unsaved buffers. | |
| 5250 @item | |
| 5251 Fixed bug with section numbering after *-red sections. | |
| 5252 @end itemize | |
| 5253 | |
| 5254 @noindent @b{Version 3.30} | |
| 5255 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5256 @item | |
| 5257 In @code{reftex-citation}, the regular expression used to scan BibTeX | |
| 5258 files can be specified using completion on known citation keys. | |
| 5259 @item | |
| 5260 New keys @kbd{a} and @kbd{A} in BibTeX selection process to cite @emph{all} | |
| 5261 entries. | |
| 5262 @item | |
| 5263 New command @code{reftex-renumber-simple-labels} to renumber simple | |
| 5264 labels like @samp{eq:13} sequentially through a document. | |
| 5265 @end itemize | |
| 5266 @noindent @b{Version 3.33} | |
| 5267 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5268 @item | |
| 5269 Multiple selection buffers are now hidden buffers (they start with a | |
| 5270 SPACE). | |
| 5271 @item | |
| 5272 Fixed bug with file search when TEXINPUTS environment variable is empty. | |
| 5273 @end itemize | |
| 5274 @noindent @b{Version 3.34} | |
| 5275 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5276 @item | |
| 5277 Additional flag in @code{reftex-derive-label-parameters} do make only | |
| 5278 lowercase labels (default @code{t}). | |
| 5279 @item | |
| 5280 All @file{.rel} files have a final newline to avoid queries. | |
| 5281 @item | |
| 5282 Single byte representations of accented European letters (ISO-8859-1) | |
| 5283 are now legal in labels. | |
| 5284 @end itemize | |
| 5285 @noindent @b{Version 3.35} | |
| 5286 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5287 @item | |
| 5288 ISO 8859 Latin-1 chars are converted to ASCII to derive better labels. | |
| 5289 This takes back the related changes in 3.34 for safety reasons.@refill | |
| 5290 @end itemize | |
| 5291 @noindent @b{Version 3.36} | |
| 5292 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5293 @item | |
| 5294 New value @code{window} for option @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref}. | |
| 5295 @end itemize | |
| 5296 @noindent @b{Version 3.38} | |
| 5297 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5298 @item | |
| 5299 @code{reftex-view-crossref} no longer moves to find a macro. Point has | |
| 5300 to be on the macro argument. | |
| 5301 @end itemize | |
| 5302 @noindent @b{Version 3.41} | |
| 5303 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5304 @item | |
| 5305 New options @code{reftex-texpath-environment-variables}, | |
| 5306 @code{reftex-use-external-file-finders}, | |
| 5307 @code{reftex-external-file-finders}, | |
| 5308 @code{reftex-search-unrecursed-path-first}. | |
| 5309 @item | |
| 5310 @emph{kpathsearch} support. See new options and | |
| 5311 @code{reftex-bibpath-environment-variables}. | |
| 5312 @end itemize | |
| 5313 @noindent @b{Version 3.42} | |
| 5314 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5315 @item | |
| 5316 File search further refined. New option @code{reftex-file-extensions}. | |
| 5317 @item | |
| 5318 @file{*toc*} buffer can show the file boundaries of a multifile | |
| 5319 document, all labels and associated context. New keys @kbd{i}, @kbd{l}, | |
| 5320 and @kbd{c}. New options @code{reftex-toc-include-labels}, | |
| 5321 @code{reftex-toc-include-context}, | |
| 5322 @code{reftex-toc-include-file-boundaries}. @refill | |
| 5323 @end itemize | |
| 5324 @noindent @b{Version 3.43} | |
| 5325 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5326 @item | |
| 5327 Viewing cross-references generalized. Now works on @code{\label}, | |
| 5328 @code{\ref}, @code{\cite}, @code{\bibitem}, @code{\index}, variations of | |
| 5329 these, and from BibTeX buffers.@refill | |
| 5330 @item | |
| 5331 New option @code{reftex-view-crossref-extra}.@refill | |
| 5332 @item | |
| 5333 Support for the additional sectioning commands @code{\addchap} and | |
| 5334 @code{\addsec} which are defined in the LaTeX KOMA-Script classes.@refill | |
| 5335 @item | |
| 5336 Files in @code{reftex-default-bibliography} will be searched along | |
| 5337 @code{BIBINPUTS} path.@refill | |
| 5338 @item | |
| 5339 Reading a parse file now checks consistency. | |
| 5340 @end itemize | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5341 @end ignore |
| 25829 | 5342 @noindent @b{Version 4.00} |
| 5343 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5344 @item | |
| 5345 RefTeX has been split into several smaller files which are autoloaded on | |
| 5346 demand. | |
| 5347 @item | |
| 5348 Index support, along with many new options. | |
| 5349 @item | |
| 5350 The selection of keys for @code{\ref} and @code{\cite} now allows to | |
| 5351 select multiple items by marking entries with the @kbd{m} key. | |
| 5352 @item | |
| 5353 Fancyref support. | |
| 5354 @end itemize | |
| 5355 @noindent @b{Version 4.01} | |
| 5356 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5357 @item | |
| 5358 New command @code{reftex-index-globally} to index a word in many | |
| 5359 places in the document. Also available from the index buffer with | |
| 5360 @kbd{&}. | |
| 5361 @item | |
| 5362 The first item in a @code{reftex-label-alist} entry may now also be a parser | |
| 5363 function to do non-standard parsing. | |
| 5364 @item | |
| 5365 @code{reftex-auto-view-crossref} no longer interferes with | |
| 5366 @code{pop-up-frames} (patch from Stefan Monnier). | |
| 5367 @end itemize | |
| 5368 @noindent @b{Version 4.02} | |
| 5369 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5370 @item | |
| 5371 macros ending in @samp{refrange} are considered to contain references. | |
| 5372 @item | |
| 5373 Index entries made with @code{reftex-index-selection-or-word} in TeX | |
| 5374 math mode automatically get enclosing @samp{$} to preserve math mode. See | |
| 5375 new option @code{reftex-index-math-format}. Requires AUCTeX. | |
| 5376 @end itemize | |
| 5377 @noindent @b{Version 4.04} | |
| 5378 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5379 @item | |
| 5380 New option @code{reftex-index-default-tag} implements a default for queries. | |
| 5381 @end itemize | |
| 5382 @noindent @b{Version 4.06} | |
| 5383 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5384 @item | |
| 5385 @code{reftex-section-levels} can contain a function to compute the level | |
| 5386 of a sectioning command. | |
| 5387 @item | |
| 5388 Multiple @code{thebibliography} environments recognized. | |
| 5389 @end itemize | |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5390 @noindent @b{Version 4.09} |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5391 @itemize @bullet |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5392 @item |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5393 New option @code{reftex-toc-max-level} to limit the depth of the toc. |
| 39267 | 5394 New key binding @kbd{t} in the @file{*toc*} buffer to change this |
|
26911
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5395 setting.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5396 @item |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5397 RefTeX maintaines an @file{Index Phrases} file in which phrases can be |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5398 collected. When the document is ready, RefTeX can search all |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5399 these phrases and assist indexing all matches.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5400 @item |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5401 The variables @code{reftex-index-macros} and |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5402 @code{reftex-index-default-macro} have changed their syntax slightly. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5403 The @var{repeat} parameter has move from the latter to the former. |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5404 Also calls to @code{reftex-add-index-macros} from AUCTeX style files |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5405 need to be adapted.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5406 @item |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5407 The variable @code{reftex-section-levels} no longer contains the |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5408 default stuff which has been moved to a constant.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5409 @item |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5410 Environments like theorems can be placed into the TOC by putting |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5411 entries for @samp{"begin@{theorem@}"} in |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5412 @code{reftex-setion-levels}.@refill |
|
d7f536a01276
Update to reftex 4.9
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
25829
diff
changeset
|
5413 @end itemize |
| 27195 | 5414 @noindent @b{Version 4.10} |
| 5415 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5416 @item | |
| 5417 Renamed @file{reftex-vcr.el} to @file{reftex-dcr.el} because of conflict | |
| 5418 with @file{reftex-vars.el} on DOS machines. | |
| 5419 @item | |
| 5420 New options @code{reftex-parse-file-extension} and | |
| 5421 @code{reftex-index-phrase-file-extension}. | |
| 5422 @end itemize | |
| 27604 | 5423 @noindent @b{Version 4.11} |
| 5424 @itemize @bullet | |
| 5425 @item | |
| 5426 Fixed bug which would parse @samp{\Section} just like @samp{\section}. | |
| 5427 @end itemize | |
|
29772
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5428 @noindent @b{Version 4.12} |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5429 @itemize @bullet |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5430 @item |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5431 Support for @file{bibentry} citation style. |
|
265fdb06f294
Update to reftex 4 14
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
29713
diff
changeset
|
5432 @end itemize |
|
34403
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5433 @noindent @b{Version 4.15} |
|
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5434 @itemize @bullet |
|
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5435 @item |
|
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5436 Small bug fixes. |
|
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5437 @item |
|
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5438 Improved interaction with Emacs LaTeX mode. |
|
6679ef9b33fe
RefTeX 4.15 update
Carsten Dominik <dominik@science.uva.nl>
parents:
30009
diff
changeset
|
5439 @end itemize |
| 25829 | 5440 |
| 5441 @node Index, , , Top | |
| 5442 @unnumbered Index | |
| 5443 @printindex cp | |
| 5444 | |
| 5445 @summarycontents | |
| 5446 @contents | |
| 5447 @bye | |
| 5448 |
